DSC Impassa v1.3 - Installation and Setup Guide (Including Z-Wave Programming)



Related Products

Impassa with AT&T 3G Alarm.com Cellular Communicator, No Transformer
List Price:
Our Price: $319.99
Impassa w/ Z-Wave Ready, AT&T Cellular Communicator

Related Categories


Document Transcript

Self Contained Wireless Alarm System
Models:
SCW9055(D)(G)(I)-433
SCW9057(D)(G)(I)-433
v1.3 Installation Guide
WARNING: This manual contains information on limitations regarding product use and
function and information on the limitations as to liability of the manufacturer. The entire manual
should be carefully read. i
Table of Contents
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
SCW9055/57 Model Differences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Compatible Wireless Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Product Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Controls & Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Data Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Mounting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Wireless Device Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Alternate Communicator Module Setup/Initialization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Operating Modes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Language Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
[Q] Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Function Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
System Removal Prevention . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
15
Template Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
DLS Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Installer Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Advanced Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
How to Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Index to Programming Worksheets and Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Programming Worksheets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Programming Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Testing & Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Testing: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Troubleshooting: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Trouble Summary: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Trouble [2] AC Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Alarm.com HSPA3G/CDMA. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Introduction to the Alarm.com Modules. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
HSPA 3G Module (3G8055)/(I) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
CDMA Module (CD8055)/(I). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Power Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Enroll Alarm.com Image Sensor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
HSPA/CDMA Phone Test (Module Registration) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Panel Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Troubleshooting: Module Status Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Improving Wireless Signal Strength . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Installer Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Regulatory Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81 ii
Appendix A: Reporting Code Formats. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Contact ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
SIA Format - Level 2 (Hard Coded) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Appendix B: 2-Way Audio Verification (SCW9057 only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Appendix C: Communicator Format Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Appendix D: Regulatory Approvals Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
SIA False Alarm Reduction Installations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 iii
Safety Instructions for Service Personnel
Warning: When using equipment connected to the telephone network, always follow the basic safety instructions provided with this
product. Save these instructions for future reference. Inform the end-user of the safety precautions that must be observed when operat-
ing this equipment.
Before Installing The Equipment
Ensure your package includes the following items:

Installation and user manuals, including the safety instructions (
Read and save these instructions!
Follow all warnings and instructions specified within this document and/or on the equipment)

SCW905x alarm controller

Power supply, direct plug-in

Mounting hardware
Selecting A Suitable Location For The Alarm Controller
Use the following list as a guide to find a suitable location to install this equipment:

Locate near a telephone socket and power outlet.

Select a location free from vibration and shock.

Place the alarm controller on a flat, stable surface and follow the installation instructions.
Do not locate this product where people may walk on the secondary circuit cable(s).
Do not connect the alarm controller to electrical outlets on the same circuit as large appliances.
Do not select a location that exposes your alarm controller to direct sunlight, excessive heat, moisture, vapors, chemicals or dust.
Do not install this equipment near water. (e.g., bath tub, kitchen/laundry sink, wet basement, near a swimming pool).
Do not install this equipment and its accessories in areas where the risk of explosion exists.
Do not connect this equipment to electrical outlets controlled by wall switches or automatic timers.
Avoid interference sources.
Avoid installing the equipment near heaters, air conditioners, ventilators, and/or refrigerators.
Avoid locating this equipment close to or on top of large metal objects (e.g., metal wall studs).
Safety Precautions Required During Installation

Never install this equipment and/or telephone wiring during a lightning storm.

Never touch uninsulated telephone wires or terminals unless the telephone line has been disconnected at the network interface.

Position cables so that accidents can not occur. Connected cables must not be subject to excessive mechanical strain.

Use only the power supply provided with this equipment. Use of unauthorized power supplies may cause damage.

For direct plug-in versions, use the transformer supplied with the device.
WARNING:
THIS EQUIPMENT HAS NO MAINS ON/OFF SWITCH. THE PLUG OF THE DIRECT PLUG-IN POWER SUPPLY IS
INTENDED TO SERVE AS THE DISCONNECTING DEVICE IF THE EQUIPMENT MUST BE QUICKLY DISCONNECTED. IT
IS IMPERATIVE THAT ACCESS TO THE MAINS PLUG AND ASSOCIATED MAINS SOCKET/OUTLET IS NEVER
OBSTRUCTED.
IMPORTANT NOTE!
This alarm system must be installed and used within an
environment that provides the pollution degree max 2 and over-
voltages category II NON-HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS, indoor
only. The equipment is direct plug-in (external transformer) and
is designed to be installed, serviced and/or repaired by service
personel only; [service person is defined as an individual having
the appropriate technical training and experience to recognize
hazards associated with the installation and operation of this
equipment and of measures to minimize the risks to themselves
and others]. This equipment contains no user-serviceable parts.
The wiring (cables) used for installation of the alarm system and
accessories must be insulated with PVC, TFE, PTFE, FEP,
Neoprene or Polyamide.
(a) The equipment enclosure must be secured to the building
structure before operation.
(b) Internal wiring must be routed in a manner that prevents:
- Excessive strain or loosening of wire on terminal
connections
- Damage of conductor insulation
(c) Disposal of used batteries must be made in accordance
with local waste recovery and recycling regulations.
(d) Before servicing, disconnect the power and telephone
connection.
(e) Do not route any wiring over circuit boards.
(f) The installer must ensure that a readily accessible discon-
nect device is incorporated into the building for perma-
nently connected installations.
The power supply must be Class II, fail safe with double or reinforced insulation between the primary and secondary circuit/enclo-
sure and be an approved type acceptable to the local authorities. All national wiring rules must be observed. iv
Guidelines for Locating Smoke & CO Detectors
The following information is for general guidance only and it is recommended that local fire codes and regulations be consulted when
locating and installing smoke and CO alarms.
Smoke Detectors
Research indicates that all hostile fires in homes generate smoke to a greater or lesser extent. Detectable quantities of smoke precede
detectable levels of heat in most cases. Smoke alarms should be installed outside of each sleeping area and on each storey of t
he home.
DSC recommends that additional smoke alarms beyond those required for minimum protection be installed. Additional areas that
should be protected include: the basement; bedrooms, especially where smokers sleep; dining rooms; furnace and utility rooms; and
any hallways not protected by the required units.
On smooth ceilings, detectors may be spaced 9.1m (30 feet) apart as a guide. Other spacing may be required depending on ceiling
height, air movement, the presence of joists, uninsulated ceilings, etc. Consult National Fire Alarm Code NFPA 72, CAN/ULC-S553-
02 or other appropriate national standards for installation recommendations.

Do not locate smoke detectors at the top of peaked or gabled ceilings; dead air space in these locations may prevent smoke detection.

Avoid areas with turbulent air flow, such as near doors, fans or windows. Rapid air movement around the detector may prevent
smoke from entering the unit.

Do not locate detectors in areas of high humidity.

Do not locate detectors in areas where the temperature rises above 38
o
C

(100
o
F) or falls below 5
o
C (41
o
F).
Smoke detectors should always be installed in USA in accordance with Chapter 11 of NFPA 72, the National Fire Alarm Code:
11.5.1.1. Where required by applicable laws, codes, or standards for a specific type of occupancy, approved single- and multipl
e-station
smoke alarms shall be installed as follows:
1.
In all sleeping rooms and guest rooms.
2.
Outside of each separate dwelling unit sleeping area, within 6.4 m (21 ft) of any door to a sleeping room, the distance measured
along a path of travel.
3.
On every level of a dwelling unit, including basements.
4.
On every level of a residential board and care occupancy (small facility), including basements and excluding crawl spaces and
unfinished attics.
5.
In the living area(s) of a guest suite.
6.
In the living area(s) of a residential board and care occupancy (small facility).
CO Detectors
CO gas moves freely in the air. The human body is most vulnerable to the effects of CO gas
during sleeping hours. For maximum protection, a CO alarm should be located outside pri-
mary sleeping areas or on each level of your home. Figure 5 indicates the suggested locations
in the home. The electronic sensor detects carbon monoxide, measures the concentration and
sounds a loud alarm before a potentially harmful level is reached.
Do NOT place the CO alarm in the following areas:

Where the temperature may drop below -10ºC or exceed 40 ºC.

Near paint thinner fumes.

Within 5 feet (1.5 meters) of open flame appliances such as furnaces, stoves and fire-
places.

In exhaust streams from gas engines, vents, flues or chimneys.

Do not place in close proximity to an automobile exhaust pipe; this will damage the
detector.
Figure 3a
Figure 2
Figure 3
Figure 4
Figure 1
GROUND
FLOOR
BASEMENT
KITCHEN
GARAGE
BEDROOM
BEDROOM
BEDROOM
CARBON MONOXIDE DETECTOR
Figure 5 v
Limited Warranty
Digital Security Controls warrants the original purchaser that for a period of twelve months from the date of purchase, the pro
duct shall be free of defects in
materials and workmanship under normal use. During the warranty period, Digital Security Controls shall, at its option, repair
or replace any defective
product upon return of the product to its factory, at no charge for labour and materials. Any replacement and/or repaired parts
are warranted for the
remainder of the original warranty or ninety (90) days, whichever is longer. The original purchaser must promptly notify Digita
l Security Controls in
writing that there is defect in material or workmanship, such written notice to be received in all events prior to expiration o
f the warranty period. There is
absolutely no warranty on software and all software products are sold as a user license under the terms of the software license
agreement included with the
product. The Customer assumes all responsibility for the proper selection, installation, operation and maintenance of any produ
cts purchased from DSC.
Custom products are only warranted to the extent that they do not function upon delivery. In such cases, DSC can replace or credit at its option.
International Warranty
The warranty for international customers is the same as for any customer within Canada and the United States, with the exceptio
n that Digital Security
Controls shall not be responsible for any customs fees, taxes, or VAT that may be due.
Warranty Procedure
To obtain service under this warranty, please return the item(s) in question to the point of purchase. All authorized distribut
ors and dealers have a warranty
program. Anyone returning goods to Digital Security Controls must first obtain an authorization number. Digital Security Contro
ls will not accept any
shipment whatsoever for which prior authorization has not been obtained.
Conditions to Void Warranty
This warranty applies only to defects in parts and workmanship relating to normal use. It does not cover:
• damage incurred in shipping or handling;
• damage caused by disaster such as fire, flood, wind, earthquake or lightning;
• damage due to causes beyond the control of Digital Security Controls such as excessive voltage, mechanical shock or water damage;
• damage caused by unauthorized attachment, alterations, modifications or foreign objects;
• damage caused by peripherals (unless such peripherals were supplied by Digital Security Controls Ltd.);
• defects caused by failure to provide a suitable installation environment for the products;
• damage caused by use of the products for purposes other than those for which it was designed;
• damage from improper maintenance;
• damage arising out of any other abuse, mishandling or improper application of the products.
Items Not Covered by Warranty
In addition to the items which void the Warranty, the following items shall not be covered by Warranty: (i) freight cost to the
repair centre; (ii) products
which are not identified with DSC's product label and lot number or serial number; (iii) products disassembled or repaired in s
uch a manner as to adversely
affect performance or prevent adequate inspection or testing to verify any warranty claim. Access cards or tags returned for re
placement under warranty
will be credited or replaced at DSC's option. Products not covered by this warranty, or otherwise out of warranty due to age, m
isuse, or damage shall be
evaluated, and a repair estimate shall be provided. No repair work will be performed until a valid purchase order is received from the Customer and a
Return Merchandise Authorization number (RMA) is issued by DSC's Customer Service.
Digital Security Controls Ltd.’s liability for failure to repair the product under this warranty after a reasonable number of a
ttempts will be limited to a
replacement of the product, as the exclusive remedy for breach of warranty. Under no circumstances shall Digital Security Contr
ols be liable for any
special, incidental, or consequential damages based upon breach of warranty, breach of contract, negligence, strict liability,
or any other legal theory. Such
damages include, but are not limited to, loss of profits, loss of the product or any associated equipment, cost of capital, cost of substitute or replacement
equipment, facilities or services, down time, purchaser’s time, the claims of third parties, including customers, and injury to
property. The laws of some
jurisdictions limit or do not allow the disclaimer of consequential damages. If the laws of such a jurisdiction apply to any cl
aim by or against DSC, the
limitations and disclaimers contained here shall be to the greatest extent permitted by law. Some states do not allow the exclu
sion or limitation of incidental
or consequential damages, so that the above may not apply to you.
Disclaimer of Warranties
This warranty contains the entire warranty and shall be in lieu of any and all other warranties, whether expressed or implied (
including all implied
warranties of merchantability or fitness for a particular purpose) and of all other obligations or liabilities on the part of D
igital Security Controls. Digital
Security Controls neither assumes responsibility for, nor authorizes any other person purporting to act on its behalf to modify
or to change this warranty,
nor to assume for it any other warranty or liability concerning this product. This disclaimer of warranties and limited warrant
y are governed by the laws of
the province of Ontario, Canada.
WARNING: Digital Security Controls recommends that the entire system be completely tested on a regular basis. However,
despite frequent testing, and due to, but not limited to, criminal tampering or electrical disruption, it is possible for this
product to
fail to perform as expected.
Out of Warranty Repairs
Digital Security Controls will at its option repair or replace out-of-warranty products which are returned to its factory accor
ding to the following
conditions. Anyone returning goods to Digital Security Controls must first obtain an authorization number. Digital Security Con
trols will not accept any
shipment whatsoever for which prior authorization has not been obtained.
Products which Digital Security Controls determines to be repairable will be repaired and returned. A set fee which Digital Sec
urity Controls has
predetermined and which may be revised from time to time, will be charged for each unit repaired.
Products which Digital Security Controls determines not to be repairable will be replaced by the nearest equivalent product ava
ilable at that time. The
current market price of the replacement product will be charged for each replacement unit.
WARNING - READ CAREFULLY
Note to Installers
This warning contains vital information. As the only individual in contact with system users, it is your responsibility to bring each item in this warning to
the attention of the users of this system.
System Failures
This system has been carefully designed to be as effective as possible. There are circumstances, however, involving fire, burgl
ary, or other types of
emergencies where it may not provide protection. Any alarm system of any type may be compromised deliberately or may fail to op
erate as expected for a
variety of reasons. Some but not all of these reasons may be:


Inadequate Installation
A security system must be installed properly in order to provide adequate protection. Every installation should be evaluated by
a security professional to
ensure that all access points and areas are covered. Locks and latches on windows and doors must be secure and operate as inten
ded. Windows, doors,
walls, ceilings and other building materials must be of sufficient strength and construction to provide the level of protection
expected. A reevaluation must
be done during and after any construction activity. An evaluation by the fire and/or police department is highly recommended if this service is available.
• Criminal Knowledge
This system contains security features which were known to be effective at the time of manufacture. It is possible for persons
with criminal intent to
develop techniques which reduce the effectiveness of these features. It is important that a security system be reviewed periodi
cally to ensure that its features
remain effective and that it be updated or replaced if it is found that it does not provide the protection expected.
• Access by Intruders
Intruders may enter through an unprotected access point, circumvent a sensing device, evade detection by moving through an area
of insufficient coverage,
disconnect a warning device, or interfere with or prevent the proper operation of the system.
• Power Failure
Control units, intrusion detectors, smoke detectors and many other security devices require an adequate power supply for proper
operation. If a device
operates from batteries, it is possible for the batteries to fail. Even if the batteries have not failed, they must be charged,
in good condition and installed
correctly. If a device operates only by AC power, any interruption, however brief, will render that device inoperative while it
does not have power. Power
interruptions of any length are often accompanied by voltage fluctuations which may damage electronic equipment such as a secur
ity system. After a
power interruption has occurred, immediately conduct a complete system test to ensure that the system operates as intended.
• Failure of Replaceable Batteries
This system’s wireless transmitters have been designed to provide several years of battery life under normal conditions. The ex
pected battery life is a
function of the device environment, usage and type. Ambient conditions such as high humidity, high or low temperatures, or larg
e temperature fluctuations
may reduce the expected battery life. While each transmitting device has a low battery monitor which identifies when the batter
ies need to be replaced, this
monitor may fail to operate as expected. Regular testing and maintenance will keep the system in good operating condition.
• Compromise of Radio Frequency (Wireless) Devices
Signals may not reach the receiver under all circumstances which could include metal objects placed on or near the radio path o
r deliberate jamming or
other inadvertent radio signal interference.
• System Users
A user may not be able to operate a panic or
emergency switch possibly due to permanent or temporary physical disability, inabi
lity to reach the device in
time, or unfamiliarity with the correct operation. It is important that all system users be trained in the correct operation of
the alarm system and that they
know how to respond when the system indicates an alarm.
• Smoke Detectors
Smoke detectors that are a part of this system may not properly alert occupants of a fire for a number of reasons, some of which follow. The smoke
detectors may have been improperly installed or positioned. Smoke may not be able to reach the smoke detectors, such as when th
e fire is in a chimney,
walls or roofs, or on the other side of closed doors. Smoke detectors may not detect smoke from fires on another level of the residence or building.
Every fire is different in the amount of smoke produced and the rate of burning. Smoke detectors cannot sense all types of fire
s equally well. Smoke
detectors may not provide timely warning of fires caused by carelessness or safety hazards such as smoking in bed, violent expl
osions, escaping gas,
improper storage of flammable materials, overloaded electrical circuits, children playing with matches or arson.
Even if the smoke detector operates as intended, there may be circumstances when there is insufficient warning to allow all occupants to escape in time to
avoid injury or death.
• Motion Detectors
Motion detectors can only detect motion within the designated areas as shown in their respective installation instructions. They cannot discriminate
between intruders and intended occupants. Motion detectors do not provide volumetric area protection. They have multiple beams
of detection and motion
can only be detected in unobstructed areas covered by these beams. They cannot detect motion which occurs behind walls, ceiling
s, floor, closed doors,
glass partitions, glass doors or windows. Any type of tampering whether intentional or unintentional such as masking, painting,
or spraying of any material
on the lenses, mirrors, windows or any other part of the detection system will impair its proper operation.
Passive infrared motion detectors operate by sensing changes in temperature. However their effectiveness can be reduced when th
e ambient temperature
rises near or above body temperature or if there are intentional or unintentional sources of heat in or near the detection area. Some of these heat sources
could be heaters, radiators, stoves, barbeque's, fireplaces, sunlight, steam vents, lighting and so on.
• Warning Devices
Warning devices such as sirens, bells, horns, or strobes may not warn people or waken someone sleeping if there is an interveni
ng wall or door. If warning
devices are located on a different level of the residence or premise, then it is less likely that the occupants will be alerted
or awakened. Audible warning
devices may be interfered with by other noise sources such as stereos, radios, televisions, air conditioners or other appliance
s, or passing traffic. Audible
warning devices, however loud, may not be heard by a hearing-impaired person.
• Telephone Lines
If telephone lines are used to transmit alarms, they may be out
of service or busy for certain periods of time. Also an intrude
r may cut the telephone line or
defeat its operation by more sophisticated means which may be difficult to detect.
• Insufficient Time
There may be circumstances when the system will operate as intended, yet the occupants will not be protected from the emergency
due to their inability to
respond to the warnings in a timely manner. If the system is monitored, the response may not occur in time to protect the occupants or their belongings.
• Component Failure
Although every effort has been made to make this system as reliable as possible, the system may fail to function as intended du
e to the failure of a
component.
• Inadequate Testing
Most problems that would prevent an alarm system from operating as intended can be found by regular testing and maintenance. Th
e complete system
should be tested weekly and immediately after a break-in, an attempted break-in, a fire, a storm, an earthquake, an accident, or any kind of construction
activity inside or outside the premises. The testing should include all sensing devices, keypads, consoles, alarm indicating de
vices and any other
operational devices that are part of the system.
•Security and Insurance
Regardless
of its capabilities, an alarm system is not a substitute for property or life insurance. An alarm system also is not
a substitute for property owners,
renters, or other occupants to act prudently to prevent or minimize the harmful effects of an emergency situation.
IMPORTANT - READ CAREFULLY: DSC Software purchased with or without Products and Components is copyrighted and is purchased under the following license terms:
• This End-User License Agreement (“EULA”) is a legal agreement between You (the company, individual or entity who acquired the
Software and any related Hardware) and Digital Security Controls, a division of Tyco Safety Products Canada Ltd. (“DSC”), the m
anu-
facturer of the integrated security systems and the developer of the software and any related products or components (“HARDWARE
”)
which You acquired.
• If the DSC software product (“SOFTWARE PRODUCT” or “SOFTWARE”) is intended to be accompanied by HARDWARE, and is
NOT accompanied by new HARDWARE, You may not use, copy or install the SOFTWARE PRODUCT. The SOFTWARE PROD-
UCT includes computer software, and may include associated media, printed materials, and “online” or electronic documentation.
• Any software provided along with the SOFTWARE PRODUCT that is associated with a separate end-user license agreement is license
d
to You under the terms of that license agreement.
• By installing, copying, downloading, storing, accessing or otherwise using the SOFTWARE PRODUCT, You agree unconditionally to
be bound by the terms of this EULA, even if this EULA is deemed to be a modification of any previous arrangement or contract. I
f You
do not agree to the terms of this EULA, DSC is unwilling to license the SOFTWARE PRODUCT to You, and You have no right to use
it.
SOFTWARE PRODUCT LICENSE
The SOFTWARE PRODUCT is protected by copyright laws and international copyright treaties, as well as other intellectual property laws
and treaties. The SOFTWARE PRODUCT is licensed, not sold.
1.GRANT OF LICENSE This EULA grants You the following rights:
(a) Software Installation and Use - For each license You acquire, You may have only one copy of the SOFTWARE PRODUCT installed.

(b) Storage/Network Use - The SOFTWARE PRODUCT may not be installed, accessed, displayed, run, shared or used concurrently on or
from different computers, including a workstation, terminal or other digital electronic device (“Device”). In other words, if Y
ou have
several workstations, You will have to acquire a license for each workstation where the SOFTWARE will be used.
(c) Backup Copy - You may make back-up copies of the SOFTWARE PRODUCT, but You may only have one copy per license installed
at any given time. You may use the back-up copy solely for archival purposes. Except as expressly provided in this EULA, You ma
y
not otherwise make copies of the SOFTWARE PRODUCT, including the printed materials accompanying the SOFTWARE.
2. DESCRIPTION OF OTHER RIGHTS AND LIMITATIONS
(a) Limitations on Reverse Engineering, Decompilation and Disassembly - You may not reverse engineer, decompile, or disassemble
the
SOFTWARE PRODUCT, except and only to the extent that such activity is expressly permitted by applicable law notwithstanding thi
s
limitation. You may not make any changes or modifications to the Software, without the written permission of an officer of DSC.
You
may not remove any proprietary notices, marks or labels from the Software Product. You shall institute reasonable measures to e
nsure
compliance with the terms and conditions of this EULA.
(b) Separation of Components - The SOFTWARE PRODUCT is licensed as a single product. Its component parts may not be separated
for use on more than one HARDWARE unit.
(c) Single INTEGRATED PRODUCT - If You acquired this SOFTWARE with HARDWARE, then the SOFTWARE PRODUCT is
licensed with the HARDWARE as a single integrated product. In this case, the SOFTWARE PRODUCT may only be used with the
HARDWARE as set forth in this EULA.
(d) Rental - You may not rent, lease or lend the SOFTWARE PRODUCT. You may not make it available to others or post it on a serve
r or
web site.
(e) Software Product Transfer - You may transfer all of Your rights under this EULA only as part of a permanent sale or transfer
of the
HARDWARE, provided You retain no copies, You transfer all of the SOFTWARE PRODUCT (including all component parts, the
media and printed materials, any upgrades and this EULA), and provided the recipient agrees to the terms of this EULA. If the
SOFTWARE PRODUCT is an upgrade, any transfer must also include all prior versions of the SOFTWARE PRODUCT.
(f) Termination - Without prejudice to any other rights, DSC may terminate this EULA if You fail to comply with the terms and
conditions of this EULA. In such event, You must destroy all copies of the SOFTWARE PRODUCT and all of its component parts.
(g) Trademarks - This EULA does not grant You any rights in connection with any trademarks or service marks of DSC or its suppliers.
3. COPYRIGHT - All title and intellectual property rights in and to the SOFTWARE PRODUCT (including but not limited to any imag
es,
photographs, and text incorporated into the SOFTWARE PRODUCT), the accompanying printed materials, and any copies of the
SOFTWARE PRODUCT, are owned by DSC or its suppliers. You may not copy the printed materials accompanying the SOFTWARE
PRODUCT. All title and intellectual property rights in and to the content which may be accessed through use of the SOFTWARE
PRODUCT are the property of the respective content owner and may be protected by applicable copyright or other intellectual pro
perty
laws and treaties. This EULA grants You no rights to use such content. All rights not expressly granted under this EULA are res
erved by
DSC and its suppliers.
4. EXPORT RESTRICTIONS - You agree that You will not export or re-export the SOFTWARE PRODUCT to any country, person, or
entity subject to Canadian export restrictions.
5. CHOICE OF LAW - This Software License Agreement is governed by the laws of the Province of Ontario, Canada.
6. ARBITRATION - All disputes arising in connection with this Agreement shall be determined by final and binding arbitration in
accordance with the Arbitration Act, and the parties agree to be bound by the arbitrator’s decision. The place of arbitration s
hall be
Toronto, Canada, and the installation manual of the arbitration shall be English.
7. LIMITED WARRANTY
(a) NO WARRANTY - DSC PROVIDES THE SOFTWARE “AS IS” WITHOUT WARRANTY. DSC DOES NOT WARRANT THAT THE
SOFTWARE WILL MEET YOUR REQUIREMENTS OR THAT OPERATION OF THE SOFTWARE WILL BE UNINTERRUPTED
OR ERROR-FREE.
(b) CHANGES IN OPERATING ENVIRONMENT - DSC shall not be responsible for problems caused by changes in the operating
characteristics of the HARDWARE, or for problems in the interaction of the SOFTWARE PRODUCT with non-DSC-SOFTWARE
or HARDWARE PRODUCTS.
(c) LIMITATION OF LIABILITY; WARRANTY REFLECTS ALLOCATION OF RISK - IN ANY EVENT, IF ANY STATUTE
IMPLIES WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS NOT STATED IN THIS LICENSE AGREEMENT, DSC’S ENTIRE LIABILITY
UNDER ANY PROVISION OF THIS LICENSE AGREEMENT SHALL BE LIMITED TO THE GREATER OF THE AMOUNT
ACTUALLY PAID BY YOU TO LICENSE THE SOFTWARE PRODUCT AND FIVE CANADIAN DOLLARS (CAD$5.00).
BECAUSE SOME JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF LIABILITY FOR
CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES, THE ABOVE LIMITATION MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU.
(d) DISCLAIMER OF WARRANTIES - THIS WARRANTY CONTAINS THE ENTIRE WARRANTY AND SHALL BE IN LIEU OF
ANY AND ALL OTHER WARRANTIES, WHETHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED (INCLUDING ALL IMPLIED
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE) AND OF ALL OTHER
OBLIGATIONS OR LIABILITIES ON THE PART OF DSC. DSC MAKES NO OTHER WARRANTIES. DSC NEITHER
ASSUMES NOR AUTHORIZES ANY OTHER PERSON PURPORTING TO ACT ON ITS BEHALF TO MODIFY OR TO
CHANGE THIS WARRANTY, NOR TO ASSUME FOR IT ANY OTHER WARRANTY OR LIABILITY CONCERNING THIS
SOFTWARE PRODUCT.
(e) EXCLUSIVE REMEDY AND LIMITATION OF WARRANTY - UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES SHALL DSC BE LIABLE FOR
ANY SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, CONSEQUENTIAL OR INDIRECT DAMAGES BASED UPON BREACH OF WARRANTY,
BREACH OF CONTRACT, NEGLIGENCE, STRICT LIABILITY, OR ANY OTHER LEGAL THEORY. SUCH DAMAGES
INCLUDE, BUT ARE NOT LIMITED TO, LOSS OF PROFITS, LOSS OF THE SOFTWARE PRODUCT OR ANY
ASSOCIATED EQUIPMENT, COST OF CAPITAL, COST OF SUBSTITUTE OR REPLACEMENT EQUIPMENT, FACILITIES
OR SERVICES, DOWN TIME, PURCHASERS TIME, THE CLAIMS OF THIRD PARTIES, INCLUDING CUSTOMERS, AND
INJURY TO PROPERTY.
WARNING: DSC recommends that the entire system be completely tested on a regular basis. However, despite frequent
testing, and due to, but not limited to, criminal tampering or electrical disruption, it is possible for this SOFTWARE
PRODUCT to fail to perform as expected. Introduction
1
Introduction
This manual provides installation and programming information for the SCW9055(D)(G)(I) and SCW9057(D)(G)(I) two-way wireless
alarm system. Available hardware platforms for the 433 MHz versions are described below.
SCW9055/57 Model Differences
• SCW9057 includes all of the features of the SCW9055 plus the addition of 2-way audio.
• “D” models include a TL2553G or TL255GS alternate communicator module. These modules combine 3G or GSM with TCP/IP
Ethernet/Internet communications. Either function can be programmed as the primary or backup communicator.
• “G” models include a 3G2055, 3G8055(I), CD8055(I) or GS2055 alternate communicator module. The 3G2055 and the 3G8055(I)
are a 3G wireless cellular communicator. The GS2055 is a GSM wireless cellular communicator. The CD8055(I) is a CDMA wireless
cellular communicator. Either module can be programmed as the primary or backup communicator. The models: 3G8055(I) and
CD8055(I) contain a wireless interface for communication with third party home automation applications. Additionally, the modules
ending in I contain an image sensor interface. The functionality of the wireless interface and image sensor interface in these
modules is
considered supplementary and does not interfere with UL/ULC required functionality.

“I” models include a TL255 alternate communicator module. The TL255 is an Ethernet/Internet communicator that can be pro-
grammed as the primary or backup communicator.
Table 1-1 SCW9055/57 Models
Compatible Wireless Devices
The table below lists all wireless devices compatible with the SCW9055/57 alarm panel.
Model
(SCW9055/57)
Frequency
(MHZ)
TL2553G
(D)
TL255GS
(D)
3G2055
(G)
GS2055
(G)
3G8055(I)
(G)
CD8055(I)
(G)
TL255
(I)
NOTE:
All models can communicate via phone line
(PSTN) in addition to 3G,
GSM, and/or CDMA cellular and Internet as
described above. Refer to the associated
installation guide for information on program-
ming the communicator
modules.
NOTE:
Only models SCW9055-433, SCW9055G-
433, SCW9055D-433, SCW9055I-433,
SCW9057-433, SCW9057G-433,
SCW9057D-433, SCW9057I-433 are UL/
ULC listed.
-433
433.92

D-433
433.92

G-433
433.92

I-433
433.92

Table 1-2 Compatible Wireless
Devices
Out of the Box
SCW9055/57 alarm panel
Mounting hardware kit
Installation & User manuals Qty (1) ea.
One-way, Two-way Device installation sheets as required
Enclosures
T
he SCW9055/57 main board and keypad are installed in
a
plastic enclosure.
Tamper protection switches are installed on
the enclosure, including cover open-
ing protection and or removal from
the mounting position. The enclosure top
cover can only be removed using a flat screwdriver.
Dimensions:
227mm (L) x 141mm (W) x 42mm (D)
WT5500 (including wall bracket):
125mm (L) x 165mm (W) x 38mm (D)
WS, WLS, EV = 1-way wireless device. WT = 2-
way wireless device.
Descriptions
SCW9055/57-433
Wireless Keypads (see
notes)
UL
WT5500-433
UL
WT5500P-433
UL
WTK5504
Proximity Tag
UL
PT4
1- Way Wireless Repeater
UL
WS4920
Door Contacts
UL
WS4945
UL
WS4965
**WS4975
EV-DW4917
EV-DW4955
***EV-DW4975
Compatible Receivers: SG-System I, SG-System II, SG-System III and
SG-System IV.
Only UL approved devices are to be used with UL/ULC listed systems. SCW9055/57 Wireless Alarm System
2
Motion Detectors
UL
WS4904
UL
WS4904P
UL
WLS914-433
** Not available in North America, South America and New Zealand
***Available in North America, South America and New Zealand only
Note
: For SIA CP-01 compliant installations, the minimum required
components are: SCW9055-433 or SCW9057-433 Control Panel.
Optional components that can be used with the system are: TL255,
TL2553G, TL255GS, 3G8055(I), CD8055(I), 3G2055, GS2055,
WT5500(P)-433, PT4, WT4901, and WT4911.
Note
: For SIA CP-01 installations, key fobs (WS4939, WS4938 and
WT4989) cannot be used for panic/alarm functionality, only for Arm-
ing and Disarming functions.
Note:
WT5500X-433 software version 1.4 or higher is required to dis-
play zones 33-64. If using WT5500 v1.3 or lower, CO detectors must
be enrolled as zone 1-32.
Smoke Detector
UL
WS4916
UL
WS4926
Carbon Monoxide Detector
UL
WS4913
Flood Detector
WS4985
Glass Break Detectors
UL
WLS912L-433
Shock Detector
EV-DW4927
Wireless
Sirens
Indoor
Outdoor
UL
WT4901
UL
WT4911
Wireless Keys
UL
WS4939
WS4949
WS4959
WS4969
WS4979
UL
WT4989
Panic Pendants
UL
WS4938
WS4938-2W
Hold-up
WLS928-433
2-way Wireless Integration
module
IT-410 Introduction
3
Product Specifications
Control and Indicating Equipment Specifications
Zone Configuration
• 64 Wireless zones supported and 2 hardwired zones available on the main board
• 28 zone types, 13 programmable zone attributes
• Zone configurations available: normally closed, single EOL and DEOL supervised
• 4 wireless keypads supported: model WT5500, WT5500P, WTK5504 (433MHz or 868MHz)
• 16 separate remote access keys supported: model WT4989, WS4939, WS4949, WS4959, WS4969
• With WT5500P keypad, 16 separate proximity tags supported: model PT4/PT8
Access Codes
• Up to 16 access codes: 16 (level 2), one system master code (level 3), one installer code (level 3), and one maintenance code
• Programmable attributes for each user code (see SCW9055/57 User Guide for details)
• 58823 access code variations (6-digit codes) for each user code
Warning Device output
• Integral sounder supported capable of 85 dB @ 3m
• 4 remote, wireless indoor/outdoor warning devices supported, models WT4901/WT4911
• Programmable as steady, pulsed or temporal three (as per ISO8201) and temporal four (CO alarm) output
• Fire and CO alarm notifications have priority over burglary alarm notification.
Memory
• CMOS EEPROM memory
• Retains programming and system status on AC or battery failure
• Data Retention: 20 years min.
Programmable Outputs (PGMs)
• Up to 2 programmable outputs (PGM) with 13 options
• PGM outputs are open collector type and switched to ground, rated max. 50mA
Power Supply
• Regulated, supervised and integral to the control unit
• Type A as per EN50131-6 Standard
• Input ratings: 16.5VAC/20VA (Min.) @50/60Hz, 100mA
• Current Draw:
No alternate communicator:
240 VAC Primary
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100mA(AC)(Max)
120 VAC Primary
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130mA(AC)(Max)
16.5 VAC Secondary
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 560mA(AC)(Max)
With alternate communicator:
240 VAC Primary
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100mA(AC)(Max)
120 VAC Primary
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170mA(AC)(Max)
16.5 VAC Secondary
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 760mA(AC)(Max)
• Plug-in transformer included
• Connected, protected by fuse in primary circuit. For EU, rated 160mA/250VAC. For NA, rated 114mA/120VAC
• Transformer secondary ratings: 16VAC, 20VA min.
• AUX Output Voltage: 12VDC, -15%/+15% when AC Input Voltage is 85% to +110% of rated value
• Aux max. draw is 100mA
• Output ripple voltage: 150mVp-p max.
• Storage device: NiMH, rechargeable battery, rated 7.2VDC (nominal)
• Battery capacity:
DSC part no. 17000145
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.5Ah
DSC part no. 17000152
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.6Ah
• Note: 17000145 for use with SCW9055/57 models. 17000152 for use with SCW9055/57 G, D, and I models.
• Maximum standby time 24h (AUX=0mA)/ 4h (AUX=100mA)
• Recharging time to 80% 24hours
• Recharging current:
DSC part no. 17000145 (1.5Ah)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125mA
DSC part no. 17000152 (3.6Ah)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250mA
• Low battery trouble indication threshold 7.2VDC
• Low Battery Trouble Restore Threshold 7.6VDC
• Battery deep discharge protection (cut-off at 6VDC)
• Main board current draw (battery only): SCW9055/57 Wireless Alarm System
4
SCW9055/57 (no alternate communicator)
Standby
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .160mA DC
SCW9055/57 D,G, I, SM (including alternate communicator)
Standby
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .190mA DC
Transmit (alternate communicator module)
. . . . .195mA DC
• Resettable fuses (PTC) used on circuit board instead of replaceable fuses
• Supervision for loss of primary power source (AC Fail), battery fail or battery low voltage (Battery Trouble) with indication
provided
on the keypad
• Internal clock locked to AC power frequency
Operating Environmental Conditions
• Temperature range: -10°C to +55°C (14°F-131°F)
• Relative humidity: 93% non condensing
Note: UL/ULC tested for 0°C to +49°C (32°F to 122°F), 85%R.H.
Alarm Transmitter Equipment (ATE) Specification
• Digital dialer integral to the main control board
• Supports all major formats: SIA, Contact ID, 20BPS and Residential Dial
• Optional Dual IP/Cellular communication modules [model “D” and “D-SM” (NA only)], 3G or GSM only [model “G” and “G-SM”
(NA only)] or IP only [model “I” and “I-SM” (NA only)] can be installed in the same enclosure and can be configured as primary
communicator or back-up, with AES128 bit encryption for higher line security applications.
System Supervision Features
The SCW9055/57 continuously monitors a number of possible trouble conditions and provides audible and visual indication at the
key-
pad. Multiple signals are indicated using scroll buttons on the LCD keypads (no priority assigned).
Additional Features
• Automatic inhibit (swinger shutdown) for Alarm, Tamper, Trouble signals after 3 occurrences in a given set period (see section
[377]), Opt [1] alarms, [2] tampers, [3] troubles
• Programmable keypad lockout option (see section [012])
• 500 Event Buffer, date and time stamped Introduction
5
Controls & Indicators
The SCW9055/57 has several status indicators located on the front right side of the panel. See the table below for details:
Figure 1-1 Controls & Indicators - Keypad
Data Entry
Conventions Used in this manual
Brackets [ ] indicate numbers or symbols that must be entered on the keypad.
e.g., [

][8][Installer Code][898] requires the following key entries:
.
[

] indicates to the alarm system that a special command will be entered.
[8] places the alarm system in Installer Programming mode.
[5555] is the default installer code. The default installer code should be changed during initial programming of the system.
[898] indicates the particular programming section being accessed. e.g. [898] Wireless Device Enrollment, [899] Template Pro-
gramming, [999] Alarm System Default.
Special Keys:
Scroll symbols

on the display indicate that options can viewed by pressing the
keys. These scroll keys can also be used
to position the cursor.
The
key is similar in function to the “ENTER” key on a personal computer. It is generally used to accept the existing programming
option. It is also the first key entry for [

] commands and can be used to enter the letters A-F when in Installer Programming mode.
The
key functions similarly to the “ESC” (escape) key on a personal computer. It is generally used to exit the current program-
ming section or to return to the previous menu.
Entering Letters
1.
In Installer Programming, enter the section you want to add text to (usually a system label).
2.
Use the arrow keys [] to move the cursor to the letter you want to change.
3.
Press the number key corresponding to the letter you require. Each number button accesses three letters and a number. The first
press of the number key displays the first letter. The second press displays the second letter, etc.
Table 1-3 Controls & Indicators - Alarm Panel
Alarm Indicators
Ready: Panel is ready to be armed.
Armed: Panel is armed.
Trouble: Enter [

][2] to view troubles.
Yellow indicates trouble. Orange indicates RF Jam trouble.
AC Power: On=AC present. OFF=AC absent.
1
A, B, C, 1
2
D, E, F, 2
3
G, H, I, 3
4
J, K, L, 4
5
M, N, O, 5
6
P, Q, R, 6
7
S, T, U, 7
8
V, W, X, 8
9
Y, Z, 9,0
0
Space

LED Indicators
Ready
Armed
Trouble
Power
Function Keys:
Away
Arm
Stay
Arm
Chime
Bypass Zones
Quick Exit
X
O
Previous Screen
Select Option
Scroll Keys
Fire
Auxiliary
Panic
2x16 LCD

indicates user can
scroll through options
Emergency Keys:
System is
Ready to Arm
2
5
8
0
3
6
9
#
1
4
7
* SCW9055/9057 Wireless Alarm System
6
4.
To select lower case letters press [

], scroll to “lower case” and press [

] again to select.
5.
When the required letter or number is displayed use the arrow keys [] to scroll to the next letter.
6.
When you are finished programming the Zone Label, press the [

] key, use the [] keys to scroll to “Save” then press [

].
7.
Continue from Step 2 until all labels are programmed.
Entering ASCII Characters
To enter ASCII characters, press [

], scroll to “ASCII Entry” then press [

] to select. Enter the corresponding three-digit number and
press [

] to save and exit.
Incorrect Data Entries
To change a data entry before it has been accepted by the alarm system, use the scroll keys to reposition the cursor then re-enter the
digit. If the data has already been accepted, press [#] to exit the section then re-enter the programming section and type the data again.
If you incorrectly enter 0001 in Step 2 of
Program alarm system
in Template Programming, you must either reset the alarm system to
its default values (section [996], re-enroll all wireless devices and re-program the system) or re-enter the correct data in Installer Pro-
gramming [

][8].
Selecting Programming Options
To turn a programming option on or off, enter a programming section through Installer Programming. 8 spaces are displayed, each
rep-
resenting a separate programming option. Press the number corresponding to the option you want to activate/deactivate. Activated pro-
gramming options display the option number. Deactivated options display a dash.
e.g.
Toggle Option
12- - - -7-
In the above example, programming options 1, 2, and 7 are on.



33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
!"#$%&'()*+, -./0123
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
456789:;

@AB

DEFGHIJK
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
100
101
102
103
104
L M N OPQRSTUVWXYZ[\]^ ѽ `ഄഃ
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
120
121
122
123
124
125
126
127
160
႒ᇷ ᇸѸ ႛ ᩀ
ᩋᩂᩃᩄᩅᩐ
ᩇᩈᩖ᪫ᩋᩌᩃᩄᩅᩐ
ኊኌ
161
162
163
164
165
166
167
168
169
170
171
172
173
174
175
176
177
178
179
180
181
182
183
184
኎ነኒኔኖኘኚኜኝኡኣእኧከኩኪካኬኯኲኵኸኻኼ
185
186
187
188
189
190
191
192
193
194
195
196
197
198
199
200
201
202
203
204
205
206
207
208
ኽኾ኿዁ዃዄ዆዇ወዉዊዌዐቸ ႓ ˞ ¦ ˟ Œ ˩ ˰ ˮ ̌ ȉ
209
210
211
212
213
214
215
216
217
218
219
220
221
222
223
224
225
226
227
228
229
230
231
232
๶ ̘ᨴd᪯³˜ᨬᨭ˥ĕ˖˸ ː˭
;
ᨵ◒ ঄ è ¹ ႁ
233
234
235
236
237
238
239
240
241
242
243
244
245
246
247
248
249
250
251
252
253
254
255 Installation
7
Installation
This section describes how to install and connect the SCW9055/57.
Mounting
1.
If required, separate the front and back covers by removing
the cover screw then inserting a small slotted screwdriver
between the front and back covers and gently twist the
screwdriver to separate.
2.
Route Telephone line wiring, I/O Wiring, and AC power
through the cutout in the back cover (see Fig. 2 Mounting &
Wiring details). If Programming with DLS, see “Local Pro-
gramming with PC-Link” on page 18. If using Template pro-
gramming or Advanced Keypad programming, continue to
the next step.
3.
Secure the back cover to the wall with the hardware pro-
vided. See figure 2, Mounting & Wiring Details for hole
locations.
NOTE:
If mounting unit on a double-ganged box with the
wall tamper feature, secure the back plate to the right
side of the ganged box using the center mounting
holes. This provides the tamper switch with unob-
structed access to the wall surface.
Figure 2-1 Opening Cover
Figure 2-2 Mounting & Wiring Details
4.
Connect wiring to the terminals indicated. See Section “Wir-
ing” on page 8 for details.
NOTE:
Do NOT apply power until wiring is completed.
5.
Connect battery cable connector to the PC Board.
NOTE:
Ensure connector key is oriented correctly.
6.
Position the cover onto the back plate. Ensure tamper switch,
if used, is positioned correctly.
7.
Insert cover in the top edge of the back plate at a 35° to 55°
angle then snap cover in place.
8.
Apply power to the system.
Once the system is wired and mounted, do the following:
• Enroll devices. Enter [

][8][Installer Code][898]. See “Wire-
less Device Setup” on page 9.
• If performing Template programming, enter [

][8][Installer
Code][899]. See “Template Programming” on page 15.
NOTE:
• See DLS Programming on page 18 for reprogramming an
existing Installation.
• AC Power must be present for the alarm system to answer
incoming calls from DLS. After the initial installation 24
Hrs. is required to fully charge the standby battery.
Insert screwdriver in slots indicated.
Gently pry open cover with screwdriver
until cover separates.
Remove cover screw
Wiring Access
Battery
Wall and Case
Tamper Switch
Surface Mount
Wiring Access
Telephone Line
12 V
DC
PGM/Zones
AC Po we r
Red Grn Gr
a Br n
AC AC
Aux
1 I/O 2
+-
Ring
Tip R- 1
T-1
Cover Screw Hole
Mounting Hole
SCW9055/57
Mounting Holes
Batter y Retainer
Mounting Hole
Wiring Access
Case Tamper Switch
Communicator
Module
Telephone Line
12 V
DC
PGM/Zones
AC Po we r
Red Grn Gr
a Br n
AC AC
Aux
1 I/O 2
+-
Ring
Tip R- 1
T-1
SCW 9055/57 ( G, I, D Models)
Mounting Holes (4)
Battery
Surface Mount
Wiring Access
Cover Screw Hole SCW9055/57 Wireless Alarm System
8
Wiring
CAUTION: The installer is responsible for ensuring that the SELV (Safety Extra Low Voltage) cables (e.g., the AUX, I/O, etc.)
are routed away from the TNV circuit.
Zone Wiring
Zones can be wired for Normally Open and Normally Closed con-
tacts with Single-end-of-line (SEOL) resistors or Double End-of-
Line (DEOL) resistors. Observe the following guidelines:
• For UL/ULC listed installations use SEOL or DEOL only
• Minimum 22 AWG wire, maximum 18 AWG
• Do NOT use shielded wire
• Wire run resistance shall not exceed 100

Refer to the chart
below.
• Section [003] selects hardwired zone definition
• Section [013] Opt [1, 2] selects I/O function as Zone (Input) or
PGM (Output)
• Section [206] Opt [1, 2] activates zones 33 & 34
• Sections [133], [134] Opt [14] selects Normally Closed
• Sections [133], [134] Opt [15] selects SEOL resistors
• Sections [133], [134] Opt [16] selects DEOL resistors
NOTE:
Zones 33 and 34 will not function as hardwired zones if a
serial number is programmed in section [804][033], [034].
Zone Status - Loop Resistance/Loop Status
• Fault - 0

(shorted wire/loop)
• Secure - 5600

(contact closed)
• Tamper - infinite (broken wire, open)
• Violated - 11,200

(contact open)
PGM/Aux Power Wiring
PGMs switch to ground when activated by the alarm panel.
Connect the plus side of the device to be activated to the AUX+ terminal. Connect
the minus side of the device to the PGM. Each PGM can provide 50mA output.
NOTE:
The alarm panel can provide a maximum of 100mA of AUX current
for PGMs, relays, LED’s etc. Min/Max operating voltages for PGMs, relays
and modules is 12V
DC
- 12.6V
DC.
NOTE:
Battery Voltage (6.0-8.4V
DC
) is boosted internally to supply 12V
DC

on the AUX+ output by setting Section [014] Opt. [4] to ON. This output can
NOT be used for UL/ULC Fire installations. This option must be enabled for
PGMs used in UL/ULC Residential Burglary installations. This output cannot
be used in UL/ULC Residential Burglary installations if an alternative com-
municator is used with a 1.5Ah battery (DSC part# 17-145).
LED output with
current limiting
resistor and
optional relay
driver output
Telephone Line Wiring
Wire the telephone connection terminals (TIP, Ring, T-1, R-1) to an RJ-31X
connector as indicated. Use 24 AWG wire minimum for wiring.
For connection of multiple devices to the telephone line, wire in the sequence
indicated.
Communication format is programmed in section [350].
Telephone Call Directions are programmed in section [351]-[376].
NOTE:
For UL listed installations, the installer must verify the communication format with the supervising station at the time of installation.
Burglary Zone Wiring Chart
Wire
Gauge
Max wire length to end-of-line resistor
(feet/meters)
22
3000 / 914
20
4900 / 1493
19
6200 / 1889
18
7800 / 2377
Figures are based on maximum wiring resistance of 100

Normally Closed Loops - Do NOT use for UL Installations
Any I/O
Terminal
Double End-of-Line (DEOL) Resistor Wiring
AUX-
Terminal
2 NORMALLY CLOSED
CONTACTS WITH
NO END OF LINE
RESISTOR
1 NORMALLY CLOSED
CONTACT WITH
NO END OF LINE
RESISTOR
Single End-of-Line (SEOL) Resistor Wiring
1 NORMALLY
CLOSED
CONTACT WITH
5600Ω
END OF LINE
RESISTOR
1 NORMALLY OPEN
CONTACT WITH
5600 Ω
END OF LINE RESISTOR
1 NORMALLY OPEN
CONTACT AND
1 NORMALLY CLOSED
CONTACT WITH
5600Ω END OF LINE
RESISTOR
2 NORMALLY OPEN
CONTACTS AND
2 NORMALLY CLOSED
CONTACTS WITH
5600Ω END OF LINE
RESISTOR
A
LARM
CONTACT
DEOL CIRCUIT
1 NORMALLY
CLOSED CONTACT
WITH 5600Ω
END OF LINE RESISTORS
ALARM
CONTACT
DEOL CIRCUITS
2 NORMALLY
CLOSED CONTACTS
WITH 5600Ω END
OF LINE & TAMPER
RESISTOR
TAMPER
CONTACT
Any I/O
Terminal
Any I/O
Terminal
Any I/O
Terminal
Any I/O
Terminal
Any I/O
Terminal
Any I/O
Terminal
Any I/O
Terminal
AUX-
Terminal
AUX-
Terminal
AUX-
Terminal
AUX-
Terminal
AUX-
Terminal
AUX-
Terminal
AUX-
Terminal
I/O
I/O
T-1
R-1
TIP
RING
RJ-31X
RED
GRN
BRN
GRA Installation
9
Wireless Device Setup
This section describes how to configure wireless devices to work with the alarm panel.
Receiver Placement Test
Receiver Placement test ensures the SCW9055/57 is located in an area with low noise and interference and can successfully recei
ve sig-
nals from wireless devices.
To perform a receiver placement test:
1.
Enter Wireless Device Placement Test mode:
[

][8][XXXX][904] - for wireless zones
[

][8][XXXX][905] - for wireless keypad/ IT-410
[

][8][XXXX][906] - for wireless sirens
[

][8][XXXX][907] - for wireless repeaters
2.
The Yellow LED on the SCW9055/57 activates, indicating unacceptable RF traffic level or noise floor level. Once Wireless
Device Placement Test mode is entered, Receiver Placement Test is continuously active until placement mode is exited or Install
er
programming times out.
Wireless Device Enrollment
Enrollment consists of programming the device's Electronic Serial Number (ESN) into the panel so that it can be identified when
an event
is communicated. Two-way devices must also initiate communication with the control panel to complete the enrollment process. The con-
trol panel assigns a unique system ID, device ID and encryption key to the device. This information is stored in the device’s memory.
NOTE:
The ESN is a 6-digit alphanumeric number located on a removable sticker on the wireless device.
Methods of Enrollment
Two methods of enrollment are available:

Quick Enroll
– Used to enroll new devices on the system (see below for procedure). The Quick Enroll procedure performs one-way and
two-way enrolment communications in the background. The enrollment procedures for both types of devices are identical.

Manual or DLS Enroll
– See Installer Programming or DLS Programming (Section [804]). Manual or DLS enrollment of wireless
keys requires the device to be physically triggered to complete the enrollment.
Enroll wireless devices in the following sequence: Keypad, Sirens, Sensors, Pendants, Wireless Keys, Repeaters.
Refer to the associated installation sheets for additional details on how to activate specific wireless devices.
Enrolling Wireless Keypads
During initial power up of the alarm panel, a 2-minute window is established for enrolling the wireless keypad. If the AC Power and
Ready LEDs flash for the duration of this window, the keypad must be powered up and enrolled within this period. If not (i.e.,
The AC
Power and Ready LEDs stop flashing), power down the panel then power up again to re-open the 2-minute enrollment window.
To enroll a keypad:
1.
Power up alarm system.
• Connect alarm system to AC Power. The Ready and AC LEDs flash for 2 minutes.
2.
Power up keypad.
• Connect keypad to AC power or install new batteries. After a few seconds the keypad may beep rapidly and the LCD displays
the following: “Hold [1] and [

] to Enroll Keypad.”
• Press the [

] and [1] keys simultaneously to enroll the keypad. “WFKP Enrollment Successful” is displayed.
Battery

AC Wiring
For systems without an alternate communicator, a 1500 mAh Ni-Mh battery is
included to meet battery standby requirements. For systems with an alternate
communicator, a 3600 mAh Ni-MH battery is included. If upgrading the battery
from 1500mAh to 3600 mAh, refer to section [701] option 7.
NOTE:
UL/ULC Residential Burglary installations require 4 Hr. battery
standby time plus 4 minutes alarm annunciation.
NOTE:
UL/ULC Residential Fire installations require 24 Hr. battery standby
plus 5 minutes alarm annunciation. Requires
3600 mAh battery.
NOTE:
Battery life is 3-5 years under typical operating conditions. Battery
capacity deteriorates with age and number of charge/discharge cycles.
Replace battery every 3-5 years.
AC Transformer Requirements:
Primary:120VAC, 50/60Hz., 0.33A (NA), 240VAC, 50/
60Hz., 0.165A (EU)
Secondary: 16.5VAC/20VA
The following transformers shall be used:
UL/ULC Listed Installations - PTD1620U-CC
NOTE:
Do not connect the transformer to a receptacle
controlled by a switch. For UL/ULC Installations
use a Class 2, power limited, plug-in transformer.
CAUTION:
Handle the battery pack with care: do not subject to mechanical
shock.
NOTE:
If the “Failed to Enroll” message is displayed perform the following:
• Retry the enrollment.
• Reposition the keypad closer to the control panel.
• Verify that the READY and POWER LED indicators are flashing on the panel. If not, disconnect the panel from AC and DC
power sources then reconnect.
• Check for RF interference. See “Wireless Device Enrollment” on page 9
for more information. SCW9055/57 Wireless Alarm System
10
Quick Enrolling Keypads, Sirens, Wireless Keys & Repeaters
1.
Enter [

][8][5555][898]. The following is displayed: “Wireless Enrollment Mode.”
2.
Activate the device as indicated below or in the device’s installation sheet.
• Keypad: Press the [

] and [1] keys simultaneously.
• Siren: Power up the device, press the Tamper button or the test button to enroll.
• Wireless key: Press any key to activate. To re-enroll on another system, press and hold
and
simultaneously for 3 sec-
onds.
• For IT-410 - Press Enrollment button (Note: A keypad must be enrolled before the IT-410 can be enrolled).
• Ensure that dip switch 3 on the repeater is in the off position before quick enrolling a repeater on the SCW9055/57. Press the
tamper button to enroll.
3.
The Electronic Serial Number (ESN) is displayed on the keypad. Press [

] to confirm the ESN. If the ESN is incorrect press [#]
then repeat this step.
4.
After successful confirmation of the ESN, the system prompts for the slot number.
• The next available slot for the device type is displayed. Press [

] to accept or enter the slot number.
(keypads = 01- 04, Sirens = 01- 04, wireless keys = 01-16, wireless repeaters = 01-04).
• To re-enroll a wireless key press
simultaneously for approximately 3 seconds.
Quick Enrolling Sensors & Pendants
1.
Enter [

][8][898]. The LCD displays the following: “Wireless Enrollment Mode.”
2.
Place the wireless device in the desired location.
3.
Activate the device as described in the associated installation sheet. The electronic serial number (ESN) is displayed.
4.
Press [

] to confirm the serial number. If the serial number is incorrect, press [#] and repeat this step. After successful confirma-
tion of the serial number, the system prompts for the zone number. The next available zone is displayed.
5.
Enter a zone number (01-64) then press [

] to accept. The next available zone is preloaded.
NOTE:
Only one device may be enrolled in each zone. If a zone already has a device enrolled, press [

] to overwrite the zone or
[#] to enter another zone number.
6.
After successful entry of the zone number, the system prompts for the zone type. (The recommended zone type is displayed). Pr
ess
[

] to accept the zone type or enter:
7.
After successful entry of a valid zone type, the alarm panel automatically enters individual placement test mode for the zone that
was enrolled. “Activate Device for Test, Exit #” is displayed on the screen. The device may now be placement tested. See below
for details.
8.
Press the [#] key to return to the quick enroll screen. Repeat the above procedure for the next zone.
Quick Enrolling Proximity Tags
If this function is available on the keypad, the [

][5] menu provides the option to assign a proximity tag to an access code once the
access code has been entered. Swipe the tag to enroll it during user access code assignment.
NOTE:
To unenroll a proximity tag, the user code must be deleted.
Manual Enrollment
To manually enroll a 2-way wireless device:
1.
Enter [

][8][5555][804].
2.
Select the programming section corresponding to the device type:
3.
Enter the device serial number.
4.
Activate the device as indicated in the device’s installation sheet. This can be done while in Installer Programming or after
exiting.
The device is now enrolled.
Device Type
Zone Definition
2 Door/Window Contact
[01] Delay 1
3 PIR or Glassbreak
[05] Interior, Stay-Away
4 Smoke Detector
[88] Standard 24-Hour Fire (Wireless)
5 Pendant
[16] 24-Hour Panic
6 & 9
Wireless Key
N/A
A Wireless Repeater
N/A
• Wireless sensors and pendants
[804][001]-[0
64
]
• Wireless Key
[804][101]-[116]
• Wireless Keypad/ IT-410
[804][201]-[204]
• Wireless Siren
[804][301]-[304]
• Wireless Repeater
[804][401]-[404] Installation
11
Wireless Device Placement Test
Perform wireless device placement testing on keypads, sirens, sensors and repeaters only.
• During placement test, the sensitivity of the wireless receiver is reduced significantly. This is done to ensure that, if consistent good
placement test results are generated with reduced sensitivity, the product should have more than adequate range when placement test
exits and the sensitivity level returns to normal. During placement test, try to avoid tripping multiple devices at the same time as this
may cause collisions. A collision may cause a bad placement test result, despite having adequate coverage between the receiver and
the transmitter.
• During placement test, the wireless receiver will require 3 out of 4 wireless packets to be received before a good placement t
est result
is obtained. Outside of the placement test mode, one wireless packet received is enough to generate an alarm or trouble condition.
• This test is NOT required for wireless keys or panic pendants. Verify that wireless keys operate within the desired operating area by
arming/disarming the system.
• Test each wireless device a minimum of 5 times to ensure the location is good. Ideally all 5 attempts should provide a good pl
acement
test result.
• If a device tests bad, reposition it and test again. A slight change in placement, or the orientation of the transmitter, can cause signifi-
cant differences in the signal strength and range of a wireless device.
• Avoid mounting wireless transmitters on metal door or window frames whenever possible.
NOTE:
The indoor siren sounds during placement test, even if it is disabled in section [804][311]-[314] option 1. The outdoor siren
sounds during placement test only if section [804][311]-[314] option 1 is enabled.
Wireless Zone Placement Test
1.
To placement test a zone, press [

][8][XXXX][904]. [XXXX] represents the installer code. The LCD displays the following:
“Select Device for Test .”
2.
To perform a placement test on an individual zone, type the 2-digit zone number (01 to 64).
To perform a global placement test on a zone, type [00]. In this mode, all wireless zones, keypads, sirens and repeaters are place-
ment tested at the same time. To perform another Wireless Zone Placement test, exit the global placement test by pressing [#] a
nd
begin a new test.
3.
Place the wireless device(s) in the intended mounting location(s).
4.
Activate the device(s) as described in the associated installation sheet. The device name and zone number are displayed on the LCD.
• If the alarm system receives a STRONG signal, the bell sounds once and “Location is Good” is displayed on the LCD.
• If the alarm system receives a WEAK signal, the bell sounds 3 times and “Location is Bad” is displayed on the LCD.
• If the alarm system indicates no response, reposition the wireless device(s) and repeat the test.
• For individual placement tests, repeat step 2-3 for each device.
5.
When placement testing is complete, press [#] to exit Installer Programming.
NOTE:
Two-way wireless keys must be activated by pressing any key before they become functional.
To placement test a wireless keypad, press number keys 0-9.
To placement test a wireless siren or repeater, press the Test button or tamper the device.
Individual Wireless Device Placement Test
Individual placement testing can be performed on wireless devices. Use the scroll keys or enter a 2-digit entry to select a specific device.
1.
To individually test wireless devices, press:
[

][8][XXXX][905] - for wireless keypads/IT-410
[

][8][XXXX][906] - for wireless sirens
[

][8][XXXX][907] - for wireless repeaters
NOTE:
[XXXX] represents the installer code (default 5555).
2.
Select the wireless device you want to placement test by typing the number of the device. In section [905], type 01-04 for ke
ypads
and IT-410. In section [906], type 01-04 for siren 1 to 4. In section [907] type 01-04 for wireless repeater 1-4. Alternatively
, scroll
to the desired device and press [

] to begin the individual placement test.
3.
Place the wireless device in the intended mounting location.
4.
Activate the device as described in the associated installation sheet.
• If the alarm system receives a STRONG signal the bell sounds once and “Location is Good” is displayed on the LCD.
• If the alarm system receives a WEAK signal the bell sounds 3 times and “Location is Bad” is displayed on the LCD.
• If the alarm system indicates no response, reposition the wireless device and repeat the test.
5.
Repeat Step 2-3 for each device. Once the placement test is complete for the device, press [#] once to select the next similar device.
6.
When placement testing is complete, press [#][#][#] to exit Installer Programming.
Alternate Communicator Module Setup/Initialization
After system installation and programming, ensure that the following sections are programmed:
• central Station Phone Number, (Template Programming - Entry 5) (if applicable, in sections [301]-[303] & [305])
• account code, section [310], (Template Programming - Entry 6)
• communications Format, Section [350]- set to [03] Contact ID or [04] SIA FSK
• alternate communicator Module Enable section [382] Option [5] - set to “alternate communicator module enabled” SCW9055/57 Wireless Alarm System
12
Operation
Operating Modes
Away Arming
Away Arming arms the entire system including the perimeter and interior devices. The Ready light must be on to arm the system. If the Ready
light is off, ensure all protected doors and windows are secure or bypassed. To arm in Away mode, press and hold the Away funct
ion key for 2
seconds or enter a valid user code and leave the premises through a door programmed as Delay. The Armed light turns on when a f
unction key
is pressed or an access code is entered. If the Audible Exit Delay option is enabled, the keypad beeps once every second during the exit delay
(and three times a second during the last 10 seconds) to alert the user to leave. The Ready light turns off when the Exit Delay ends.
NOTE:
To arm in Away mode, exit though a door programmed as Delay zone after pressing the Away key.
NOTE:
In Away Arming mode, manually bypassed zones are logged and communicated to the central station.
Stay Arming
NOTE:
Requires zone definitions 05 Interior Stay/Away, 06 Delay Stay/Away, or 32 Instant Stay/Away for this function to work.
Stay Arming is intended to arm the perimeter of the premises while permitting movement within. The Ready light must be on to ar
m the
system. If the Ready light is off, ensure all protected doors and windows are secure or bypassed. To Stay arm the system, press
and hold
the Stay function key for 2 seconds or enter a valid user code and stay within the premises (do NOT violate a door programmed as
Delay). The Armed light turns on once a function key is pressed or an access code is entered. If the Stay function button is used, the
keypad will not beep during the exit delay and the user can still exit the building without the system reverting to Away mode. When a
user code is used, the keypad beeps if the Audible Exit Delay option is enabled. The Ready light turns off when the exit delay ends.
NOTE:
In Stay Arming mode, all auto-bypassed stay/away and night zones are logged and communicated to the central station.
Night Arming
Night arming arms the perimeter and restricts movement to designated interior areas. If night zones are programmed, entering [

][1] while Stay
armed activates all interior zones except those programmed as night zones. The panel can also be Night armed by pressing the Ni
ght Arm key
for 2 seconds. The Ready light must be on or the system must be Stay armed in order to enable Night arming. In Night mode only night zones
(Zone definition 37) are bypassed. When activated, acknowledgment beeps are not sounded, the exit delay is silent and the panel logs “Armed
in Night Mode.” If no night zone types are programmed, the system arms in Away mode and the panel logs “Armed in Away Mode.”
NOTE:
In Stay Arming mode, all auto-bypassed night zones are logged and communicated to the central station.
Disarming
The user must enter through a door programmed as Delay. Upon entering, the keypad emits a steady entry delay tone (and a pulsing
tone during the last 10 seconds of entry delay) to alert the user to disarm the system. To disarm the system, enter a valid user code, pres-
ent a proximity tag or use a wireless key. If an alarm occurred while the panel was armed, the keypad displays “Alarm in Memory
” and
the zone(s) that went into alarm during the armed period. Press the [#] key to return the keypad to the Ready state.
Language Selection
The keypad can be programmed to display messages and labels in different languages. Languages can be selected before the keypad
is
enrolled on the system. Perform the following when in “Ready to Arm” mode or at the Installer Programming menu:
(1) Press and hold both scroll keys [] simultaneously until language options are displayed.
(2) Scroll to a language then press [
*
] to select.
[

] Commands
The following is a list of available
[

]
commands:
[

]
[1]
Bypass (disarmed state)/Reactivate Stay/Away Zones (armed state)
[

]
[2]
Display Trouble Conditions
[

]
[3]
Display Alarm Memory
[

]
[4]
Door Chime Enable/Disable
[

]
[5][Master/Supervisory Code]
User Code Programming and Proximity Tag Enrollment
[

]
[6][Master/Supervisory Code]
User Functions
[

]
[7][1/2]
Command Outputs 1 and 2
[

]
[8][Installer Code]
Installer Programming
[

]
[9][User Code]
No-Entry Arming
[

]
[0]
Quick Arm (disarmed state)/Quick Exit (armed state)
[

][1] – Bypass/Re-activate Stay/Away and Night Zones
Press [

][1] to enter the bypass mode. If the Code Required for Bypass option is enabled, enter a valid user code. The keypad will dis-
play ‘Scroll to Bypass Zones.’ The keypad will display the programmed zone labels for the zones and include the letter ‘O’ in the bot-
tom, right corner if the zone is violated or the letter ‘B’ if the zone is bypassed. Scroll to the appropriate zone and press the
[

]
key to
change the bypass status (or enter the 2-digit zone number). Once the correct zones are bypassed, press [#] to exit.
Additional Bypass Commands:
Bypass Recall:
Press [99].
The keypad will recall the last group of zones that were bypassed.
Clear Bypass:
Press [00].
The keypad will clear the bypass on all zones.
Save Bypass:
Press [95].
The keypad will save which zones are manually bypassed.
Recall Save:
Press [91].
The keypad will recall the bypassed zones that were saved. Operation
13
Re-activate Stay/Away and Night Zones:
Press
[

]
[1] when the system is armed in the Stay mode to change the armed status to Away mode or Night mode. The system will add
the Stay/Away zones back into the system after the exit delay time expires.
If any zones are programmed as Night Zones (zone definition 37) pressing
[

]
[1] will activate the Night mode instead of Away mode.
Only Night Zones will be bypassed.
[

][2] – Trouble Display
Refer to Section 6: Testing & Troubleshooting, for troubleshooting assistance and a detailed description of all trouble conditions.
[

][3] – Alarm Memory Display
Press
[

]
[3] to view alarms that occurred during the last armed period. The message “Scroll to view Alarms” is displayed. Use the
scroll keys to display zones that went into alarm. To clear the memory, arm then disarm the system.
[

][4] – Door Chime Enable/Disable
Press
[

]
[4]. The keypad emits 3 rapid beeps to indicate that the door chime feature is enabled or a steady 2-second tone to indicate it
is
disabled. The same function can be performed by pressing and holding the Chime function key for 2 seconds.
[

][5] – Program User Codes
The following table identifies available user codes:
Programming User Codes
Press
[

]
[5] followed by the master code. The keypad displays the first user (01) and includes the letter “P” if the user code is pro-
grammed. Scroll to a user number and press
[

]
to program the user (or enter the 2-digit user number). Enter a new 4 or 6-digit user
code or press
[

]
to delete the user code. After the code is programmed or deleted, scroll to another user number or press [#] to exit.
NOTE:
Proximity tags can be assigned to a programmed user code on WT5500P keypads. After assigning a user code, swipe the tag to
assign it to the user. A T is displayed in the lower right hand corner of the user code indicating that a tag is associated with it. To
delete a proximity tag, the user code must be deleted. Refer to the Proximity Tag Installation Sheet for details. The proximity
tag can be used in place of the access code for any of the featured referred to in the Operation section of this manual.
Programming User Attributes
Press
[

]
[5] followed by the master code or supervisor code. Press [9] followed by the 2-digit user number to view user attributes.
To change user attributes, press the number corresponding to the attribute or scroll to the desired attribute and press
[

]
. When the cor-
rect attributes are assigned to the user, press [#] to exit. To change the attributes for another user, press [9] followed by the 2-digit user
number. When finished, press [#] to exit.
NOTE:
• These attributes affect the operation of wireless keys.
• Wireless key numbers (01-16) correspond with user access codes (01-16).
• Duress codes are not valid when entering
[

]
[5],
[

]
[6] or
[

]
[8] sections.
• Duplicate codes and codes that are ± 1 of an existing code can not be programmed.
[

][6] – User Functions
To access the User Functions section, press
[

]
[6] followed by the master or supervisor code. Select one of the functions described
below by pressing the corresponding number or scrolling to the desired option then pressing
[

]
.
Code
Type
Function
[01] – [16]
[40]
General User Codes
Master Code
Determined by attributes programmed below
All attributes described below
[1]
Supervisor’s Code: This code is used for validation when entering the
[

]
[5] User Code Programming section and
[

]
[6]
User Functions section. Note, the supervisor’s code can only validate programming for codes with equal or lesser attributes.
The supervisor’s code also allows the user to create bypass groups if an access code is required to enter
[

]
[1] Bypassing.
[2]
Duress Code: Duress codes are standard user codes that transmit the Duress Alarm Reporting Code whenever the code is
entered to perform any function on the system.
[3]
Bypass Zones: The user can manually bypass zones if bypassing requires an access code.
[4]
Phone Access: This attribute is used to specify which users can access the system remotely.
Note: After 5 invalid access codes, remote access is locked out. The invalid access codes timer is cleared every 60 minutes.
Valid access codes do not reset the invalid access code count.
[7]
Bell Squawk On Arming/Disarming: The panel squawks the bell when the user arms using the Away function key and a
user code, or if the away function key is pressed on an identified wireless key.
[8]
One-time Use Code: The one-time-use code allows unlimited arming but only permits a single disarming once a day. The
Disarm function is restored at midnight.
[1]
Program Time and Date: Enter the time and date using the following format [HH:MM] [MM/DD/YY]. Program the time
using military standard (e.g., 8:00 pm = 20:00 hours).
[2]-[3] Future Use SCW9055/57 Wireless Alarm System
14
Additional Keypad Functions
The following additional keypad functions are available:
Event Buffer:
View the 500-event panel buffer
Brightness Control:
Adjust the display backlighting level for optimal viewing
Contrast Control:
Adjust the display contrast level for optimal viewing
Buzzer Control:
Adjust the keypad buzzer tone for optimal sound
SMS Phone Number Programming:
Program up to 8 phone numbers for the panel to accept incoming SMS commands
[

][7][1 or 2] – Command Outputs (1&2)
Press
[

]
[7] then [1] or [2]. If the Command Output Code Required option is enabled, enter a valid user code. The panel activates a
command output assigned to any PGM.
[

][8] – Installer Programming
Press
[

]
[8][Installer Code] to enter Installer Programming. Installer programming allows the installer to program all system functions.
Refer to section 5: Installer Programming, for details.
[

][9][User Code] – No-Entry Arming
Press
[

]
[9] followed by a valid user code. The system arms in the Stay mode after the exit delay expires and removes the entry delay. A
ll
zones programmed as Delay function in the same way as Instant zones. The system flashes the Armed light to indicate that it is armed
with no entry delay.
[

][0] – Quick Arm/Quick Exit
Quick Arm: When disarmed, press
[

]
[0] to arm the system. Quick Arm is equivalent to entering your user code.
Quick Exit: When armed, press
[

]
[0] to activate Quick Exit. Quick Exit allows you to exit the premises without disarming the sys-
tem.The system allows a single zone programmed as Delay to be violated and restored once during the following 2 minute time per
iod
without changing the status of the system.
Function Keys
The keypad has 5 programmable one-touch function keys located in a column down the right-side of the keypad. These keys can als
o be
activated by pressing and holding number [1] through [5] respectively for 2 seconds. The default for these keys are as follows:
[1] Stay Arm
[4] Bypass
[2] Away Arm
[5] Quick Exit
[3] Chime Enable/Disable
System Removal Prevention
The SCW9055/57 includes a feature to prevent intruders from disabling the system by removing it from the wall.
This feature operates as follows:
1.
When an entry delay is started, the panel notifies the alternate communicator.
2.
The communicator establishes contact with the network as soon as it receives the above notification.
3.
If a system tamper is detected, the panel notifies the communicator, sending a burglary event to the central station.
[4]
System Test: The system activates the siren output on medium volume for 2 seconds followed by full volume alarm for 2
seconds. All display lights and LCD pixels turn on.
[5]
System Serv/DLS: Installer Programming, either by DLS or via the keypad (
[

]
[8]), is enabled for 6 hours.
[6]
User Initiated DLS: The panel attempts to call the DLS computer.
[8]
User Walk Test Mode: This mode tests the operation of each detector in the system. Press
[

]
[6][Master Code][8] to initiate
Walk Test. While in Walk Test, the Ready, Armed, and Trouble LED's on the keypad flash to indicate that the test is active.
When a zone is violated during the test, a 2-second tone sounds on all system keypads to indicate that the zone is working
correctly. Re-entering [
*
][6][Master Code][8] exits Walk Test. The system automatically ends the test after 15 minutes without
zone activity. An audible warning (5 beeps every 10 seconds) is sounded, beginning 5 minutes before the test ends.
NOTE:
Do not activate [F]ire, [A]uxiliary and [P]anic keys, or Fire and CO zones during a walk test. If an [F], [A], or [P] key is
pressed during a walk test, or if a fire or CO alarm is detected, walk test ends automatically and the reporting codes for the
alarm are sent immediately to the monitoring station.
[9]
Late to Open Control: Notifies a user if their alarm system is not disarmed by a programmed time of day (see Late to Open
Time of Day). If the system is not disarmed at the programmed time, an alert is sent to the monitoring station. The keypad
displays “Late to Open is Enabled” and sounds a beep if [9] is pressed within the User Functions menu when this feature is
off. The LCD keypad displays “Late to Open is Disabled” and sounds an error tone if [9] is pressed within the User
Functions menu when this feature is on.
[0]
Late to Open Time of Day: Sets the time for Late to Open Control programmed for attribute [9] operation. Valid entries are
00:00 - 23:59. Entering 99:99 disables the late to open feature for that day. After [0] is pressed in the
[

]
[6] menu, acknowledge
beeps are sounded and the message “Press
[

]
for Sunday” is displayed on the keypad. Pressing [>] scrolls through each day
of the week from Sunday to Saturday. While in the Late to Open menu, entering keys 1-7 also selects the day. Programming
15
Programming
The SCW9055/57 can be programmed using the following methods:
Template Programming
Template Programming allows the installer to quickly program the minimum functions required for basic operation. The installer is
prompted to enter a 4-digit code that selects predefined zone definitions, reporting code formats, and troubles/restores (see t
he tables for
digits 1 - 4 below).
Perform the following after completing the hardware installation. Ensure you have the information listed below available for program-
ming. Record this information in “Programming Worksheets” on page 21 for future reference:
• Monitoring Station Telephone Number - Provided by your alarm monitoring service.
• Monitoring Station Account Code - Provided by your alarm monitoring service.
• Downloading Access Code.
• Entry Delay - Installer defined.
• Exit Delay - Installer defined.
• Installer Code - Programmable, unique 4-digit code. The default value is [5555].
To perform template programming:
1.
At the “Ready to Arm” screen, enter [

][8][5555][899].
2.
At the “Enter Data” screen, enter [0001] to accept the existing default programming. See the tables
below for details of digits 1-4.
NOTE:
Once this section has been entered, the Installer cannot exit until all sections are completed. Enter new data and/or press #
key to accept the displayed data and proceed to the next section. Changing a single digit, then pressing the # key advances
to the next section but does not save the changed data. Enter all 4 digits or scroll to the end of template programming and
exit to save data.
3.
After entering [0001], the first telephone entry is displayed. Enter the monitoring station telephone
number after the “D.” Press [#] to complete the entry.
4.
After programming the first telephone number, enter a system account code.
• The system account code can be any 6-digit combination of numbers (0-9) and letters (A-F). If the system account code is 4-
digits, the last two digits must be “FF.”
• To enter letters A through F, press [

] then the numbers 1 through 6 for the letter A through F respectively. Press [

] again to
revert back to decimal entry. E.g., to enter “1234FF” press [1234

66].
See section [310] for additional details.
5.
After programming the system account code, the downloading access code is displayed. Enter the new
downloading access code or press [#] to proceed to the next step. See section [403] for additional
details.
6.
The entry delay is the amount of time given to disarm the alarm system, after entering the premises
through a delay type zone, before an alarm is sounded. Press [>][>][>] to accept the default time of 30
seconds (030) or enter an entry delay between 001 and 255. E.g., Press 020 for a delay of 20 seconds.
See section [005] for additional details.
7.
The exit delay is the amount of time given to exit the premises after pressing the Arm key before the
alarm system is armed. Press [>][>][>] to accept the default time of 120 seconds or enter an entry
delay between 001 and 255. E.g., press 030 for a delay of 30 seconds. See section [005] for additional
details.
Programming Method
Description
Procedure
Template Programming
Allows the minimum required data to be pro-
grammed. It also allows for the setup of DLS
downloading software.
Press [899] at the “Enter Section” screen.
See Template Programming below for details.
DLS Programming
Allows programming to be downloaded using
DLS-IV™ software.
• DLS programming can be performed locally
with a PC-Link cable and a PC with DLS-IV
software installed.
• DLS programming can be performed remotely
via telephone line, Cellular network or the
Internet.
DLS Programming can be set up from Template Pro-
gramming (See Steps 3, 4 and 5) or from Installer Pro-
gramming (See programming sections [401]-[404]).
Installer Programming
Allows direct access to all programming sections.
Template programming is accessed from here.
Press [

][8][Installer Code] while the system is dis-
armed.
Refer to Installer Programming in section 4.3 for
details. SCW9055/9057 Wireless Alarm System
16
8.
After programming the exit delay, enter a 4 or 6-digit installer code depending on the value in section
[701] option 5. See “[006] Installer Code” on page 21 for installer code details.
9.
Press [#] to exit Template Programming.

Digit 1
selects 1 of the following 6 options for Zone definitions for the first 8 zones. A “0” in the digit 1 location indicates that the
default settings for the first 8 zones are in place unless overridden. See Section [001]-[002] on page 21 for defaults.

Digit 2
selects 1 of the following 6 options for Reporting Codes

Digit 3
selects 1 of the 8 following options

Common Group
- Sets all Reporting Codes to Automatic
Zone Definitions (Options 1- 6)
Option Zn1 Zn2 Zn3 Zn4 Zn5 Zn6 Zn7 Zn8
1 Delay 1
1 13334444
2 Delay 2
2 133555588
3 Instant
3 133555587
4 Interior
4 11333333
5 Interior Stay/Away
5 13365555
6 Delayed Stay/Away
6 133655588
87 Delayed 24Hr. Fire (Wireless)
Refer to “[001]-[004] Zone Definitions” on page 44 for details
88 Standard 24 Hr. Fire (Wireless)
Opt# Phone Line 1
Pro
gramming Section
Phone Line 2
Programming Section
1
Disabled
[380] Opt 1 OFF
Disabled
2
SIA automatic reporting codes enabled [350] 1st Phone # [04]
[380] Opt 1 ON
[381] Opt 3 OFF
SIA automatic reporting codes
enabled
[350] 2nd Phone # [04]
3
Contact ID reporting codes enabled
[350] 1st Phone # [03]
[380] Opt 1 ON
[381] Opt 7 OFF
SIA automatic reporting codes
enabled
[350] 2nd Phone # [04]
[381] Opt 3 OFF
4
SIA automatic reporting codes enabled [350] 1st Phone #[04]
[380] Opt 1 ON
[381] Opt 3 OFF
Residential dial
enabled
[350] 2nd Phone # [06]
5
Contact ID reporting codes enabled
[350] 1st Phone # [03]
[380] Opt 1 ON
[381] Opt 7 OFF
Residential dial
enabled
[350] 2nd Phone # [06]
6
Contact ID reporting codes enabled
[350] 1st Phone # [03]
[380] Opt 1 ON
[381] Opt 7 OFF
Contact ID reporting codes
enabled
[350] 2nd Phone # [03]
Option
Common
Group
Selected
Troubles
Openings/
Closings
Zone
Restores
DLS/Installer
Lead In/Out
1

2


3

4


5

6

7

8

indicates included, Blank indicates default setting,

indicates disabled
Description
Phone 1 Phone 2 Sections
Set all reporting codes to automatic
[320] - [348] FF
Alarm/restore call directions enabled

[351][1] ON, [2] OFF
Tamper/restore call directions disabled

[359][1] OFF, [2] OFF
Opening/closing call directions disabled

[367][1] OFF, [2] OFF
Maintenance call directions enabled

[375][1] ON, [2] OFF Programming
17

Selected Troubles
- Enables the following Troubles

Openings & Closings
- Sets Residential Dial Reporting Codes for all openings and closings

Installer Lead-in/Lead-out and DLS Lead-in/Lead-out
Digit 4
indicates/selects one of the three following DLS connections
Trouble
[345] Alarms [346] Restore
Battery FF
FF
AC Failure
00
00
Fire Trouble
FF
FF
Aux PS
FF
FF
TLM
XX
00
General System
00
00
FF = General System Trouble, 00 = Disabled, XX = Not transmitted
Users CLOSINGS, Residential Dial Reporting Codes
Section
1-8
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
[339]
9-16
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
[339]
40
99
FF
FF
FF
FF
XX
XX
XX
[341]
Users OPENINGS, Residential Dial Reporting Codes
Section
1-8
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
[342]
9-16
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
[342]
40
98
FF
XX
XX
XX
XX
XX
XX
[344]
Enable Opening/Closings call directions for phone 2
FF=Communicates in automatic mode, XX=Not used
[367] Opt 2 ON
DLS Lead In
Sect [347] Opt 4
DLS Lead Out
Sect [347] Opt 5
Installer Lead Out
Sect [347] Opt 11
Installer Lead In
Sect [347] Opt 12
Disabled for all template options except option 8
Option
Double Call
Sect [401] Opt 1
Call Back
Sect [401] Opt 3
User Call Up
Sec [401] Opt 4
#Rings
Sect [406] Opt 3
1

000
2

008
3

008
4

008 SCW9055/9057 Wireless Alarm System
18
DLS Programming
Installer Programming
Enter [

][8][Installer Code].
The system prompts for a 3-digit programming section number (refer to Chapter 5 for programming details).
Local Programming with PC-Link
Follow the steps below in the sequence indicated to set up local programming using DLS:
1.
Connect AC Wiring before mounting the back plate.
NOTE:
In a new installation, the backup battery requires 24 Hrs. charging. AC Power is required for PC-Link Programming until
battery is charged.
2.
Remove the front cover from the backplate, taking care not to disconnect the alternate communicator module and battery connec
tors.
3.
Initiate a DLS PC-Link session on the DLS computer.
4.
Plug in PC-Link header.
5.
Initiate DLS session on the DLS computer.
Figure 4-1PC-Link Connection
NOTE:
Connecting the DLS PC to the system automatically initiates the connection.
6.
When the session is complete, remove the PC-Link cable from the alarm system.
7.
Complete the installation.
Local Firmware Upgrade
1.
If the unit is mounted on the wall, remove the front cover from the back plate or remove the entire unit from the wall. Plug
in the
DLS header. Power down and power up the unit.
NOTE:
The DLS session must be initiated within 10 seconds of power up. Do not attempt to perform a firmware upgrade if low
battery trouble is present.
2.
Open the Flash Utility application within DLS, select the latest firmware file from the Web or browse to the saved flash file on
your hard drive. Follow the steps as prompted by the Flash Utility application. A message is displayed when download is com-
plete.
3.
Once the firmware update is complete, the panel powers up.
Remote Firmware Upgrade
The panel firmware can be upgraded remotely via communicator. If a firmware upgrade is available or if the installed firmware is
faulty, the latest version is installed. During the update, "FW Updating" is displayed on the on-board LCD. If the firmware upd
ate fails,
"System Error" (top line) "Service Req." (bottom line) is displayed.
The Panel performs a firmware update under the following conditions:
• The Panel is not armed
• No AC trouble is present
• No low battery trouble is present
• No FTC trouble is present
• Every alarm in memory has been viewed
• No events are being communicated
Remote Programming (via telephone line)
Refer to Section “[401] First Downloading Options” on page 31 and page 59 for details.
NOTE:
AC Power must be present for the alarm system to answer incoming calls from DLS.
PC-Link
Connector Advanced Programming
19
Advanced Programming
How to Program
To help reduce programming time and eliminate errors, fill in the Programming Worksheet with the required programming defaults
before programming the system.
To enter Installer Programming, press [

][8][Installer Code]. The LCD keypad displays “Enter Section.” An error tone sounds if an
incorrect installer code is entered. Press [#] to clear any key presses and try again.
The Armed and Ready lights indicate programming status:
Programming Toggle Options
Enter a 3-digit programming section number:
• The Armed light turns OFF and the Ready light turns ON.
• The keypad displays which toggle options are ON or OFF according to the table below
:
• To toggle an option ON or OFF, press the corresponding number on the keypad. The display changes accordingly.
• When all the toggle options are configured correctly, press the [#] key to exit the program section.
• The Ready light turns OFF, the Armed light turns ON and the LCD displays “Enter Section.”
Programming Decimal and Hexadecimal (HEX) Data
• Enter a 3-digit programming section number
• The Armed light turns OFF and The Ready light turns ON
• Enter data in the spaces provided
For sections that require multiple 2 or 3 digit numbers, the keypad emits a double-beep after each 2 or 3 digit entry and moves to the
next item in the list. After the last digit in the section is entered, the keypad beeps rapidly 5 times and exits the programming section.
The Ready light turns OFF, the Armed light turns ON and the LCD displays “Enter Section.”
For sections that do not require data for every box (such as phone numbers) press the [#] key to exit the programming section after
entering all the required data. The Ready light turns OFF, the Armed light turns ON and the LCD displays “Enter Section.”
At any time the [#] can be pressed to exit a programming section. All changes (excluding Template Programming) are saved.
Hex Digits
In addition to the standard digits 0-9, HEX digits and special dialer functions can also be programmed.
To enter a HEX digit:
1.
Press the [

] key to begin HEX programming. The Ready light will FLASH.
2.
Press the number corresponding to the HEX digit required (1=A, 2=B, 3=C, 4=D, 5=E, 6=F). The Ready light will continue to
FLASH.
3.
Press [

] again to return to normal decimal programming. The Ready light will turn ON.
How to Exit Installer Programming
To exit Installer Programming, press the [#] key at the “Enter Section” screen
Viewing Programming
The keypad immediately displays all programmed information when a section is entered. Use the arrow keys () to scroll throug
h the
available data. Scroll past the end of the data displayed or press the [#] key to exit the section.
i
The default installer code is
[5555]
.
Armed Light ON
Panel waiting for 3-digit section number
Ready Light ON
Panel waiting for data to be entered
Ready Light FLASHING
Panel waiting for HEX data to be entered
i
You cannot enter Installer Programming while the system is armed or in alarm.
Option ON
Option OFF
# Displayed
Dash [-] Displayed SCW9055/9057 Wireless Alarm System
20
Index to Programming Worksheets and Descriptions
Programming Option PWS/Desc.
[001]-[004] Zone Definitions..............................................21/44
[005] System Times ............................................................21/46
[006] Installer's Code ..........................................................21/46
[007] Master Code ..............................................................21/46
[008] Maintenance Code.....................................................21/46
[009] I/O Programming.......................................................22/46
[012] Keypad Lockout Options ..........................................22/47
[013] First System Options .................................................22/48
[014] Second System Options.............................................22/48
[015] Third System Options................................................22/49
[016] Fourth System Options..............................................23/49
[018] Sixth System Options ................................................23/50
[023] Tenth System Options ...............................................23/50
[024] Eleventh System Options ..........................................23/51
[030] Zone Loop Response Options ...................................23/51
[101]-[164] Zone Attributes ................................................24/51
[167] Alt. Comm. Communications Wait for Ack ..............24/52
[168] Daylight Saving Time Begin .....................................24/52
[169] Daylight Saving Time End ........................................24/52
[170] PGM Output Timer....................................................24/52
[176] Cross Zone/Police Code Timer .................................25/53
[190] No Activity Arming Pre-Alert Timer ........................25/53
[191] No Activity Arming Timer ........................................25/53
[202]-[209] Zone Assignments ...........................................25/53
[301] First Telephone Number ............................................25/53
[302] Second Telephone Number .......................................25/53
[303] Third Telephone Number ..........................................25/53
[304] Call Waiting Cancel String ........................................25/53
[305] Fourth Telephone Number.........................................25/53
[310] System Account Code ...............................................25/53
[320]-[323] Alarm Rep. Codes ...........................................26/54
[324]-[327] Alarm/Restore Rep. Codes ..............................26/54
[328] Misc. Alarm Rep. Codes ...........................................26/54
[329] Priority Alarm/Restore Rep. Codes ...........................27/54
[330]-[333] Tamper Rep. Codes .........................................27/54
[334]-[337] Tamper Restore Rep. Codes ............................27/54
[338] Misc. Tamper Rep Codes. .........................................27/54
[339] Closing (Arming) Rep. Codes ...................................27/54
[341] Misc. Closing (Arming) Rep. Codes .........................28/54
[342] Opening (Disarming) Rep. Codes ............................28/55
[344] Misc. Opening (Disarming) Rep. Codes. ..................28/55
[345] Maintenance Alarm Rep. Codes................................28/55
[346] Maintenance Restore Rep. Codes..............................28/55
[347] Misc. Maintenance Rep. Codes.................................28/55
[348] Test Transmission Rep. Codes...................................28/56
[350] Communicator Format Options.................................28/56
[351] Alarm/Rest. Comm. Call Directions .........................29/56
[359] Tamper/Rest. Comm. Call Directions .......................29/56
[367] Opening/Closing Comm. Call Directions .................29/56
[375] System Maint. Comm. Call Directions .....................29/56
[376] System Test Trans. Comm. Call Directions ..............29/56
[377] Communication Variables .........................................29/57
[378] Test Transmission Time of Day.................................29/57
[380] First Communicator Options .....................................30/57
[381] Second Communicator Options ................................30/58
[382] Third Communicator Options ...................................30/58
[383] Fourth Communicator Options..................................31/58
[389] Alt. Comm. Fault Check Timer .................................31/59
[401] Downloading Options ...............................................31/59
[402] DLS Downloading Computer’s Phone Number........31/60
[403] DLS Downloading Access Code ...............................31/60
Programming Option (cont.) PWS/Desc.
[404] Panel ID Code ........................................................... 31/60
[405] Double Call Timer .................................................... 31/60
[406] Number of Rings to Answer On ............................... 31/60
[501]-[502] PGM Output Attributes ................................... 32/60
[591]-[592] Inactivity Timers 1&2 Start/End Times .......... 32/61
[600]-[601] 2-way Audio Control Options......................... 33/62
[609] Module Tamper Rep. Codes ..................................... 33/62
[610] Alternate Com. Receiver Trouble Rep. Codes .......... 33/62
[611] Repeater Tamper/AC Loss Rep. Codes..................... 33/62
[700] Automatic Clock Adjust............................................ 34/62
[701] First International Options ........................................ 34/62
[702] Second International Options.................................... 34/63
[703] Delay Between Dialing Attempts ............................. 34/63
[800] Door Chime Options for Zones 1-64 ........................ 34/63
[804] Wireless Programming.............................................. 35/63
[001]-[064] Wireless Zone Programming ................. 35/63
[081] Wireless Supervisory Window ......................... 35/64
[082]-[089] Zone Transmitter Supervision................ 36/64
[101]-[116] Wireless Key Serial Number.................. 36/64
[141]-[156] Wireless Key Function Key Options ..... 36/64
[181]-[182] Wireless Key Enable/Disable................. 36/64
[201]-[204] Wireless Keypad Serial Number ............ 37/64
[301]-[304] Wireless Siren Serial Number ................ 37/64
[311]-[314] Wireless Siren Options........................... 37/64
[320] Global Siren Options ....................................... 38/65
[330] Maximum Outdoor Siren Activation Timer..... 38/65
[401]-[404] Wireless Repeater Programming ........... 38/65
[900] General Wireless Options ................................ 38/65
[850] Cellular Signal Strength (DSC Communicator.)........38/65
[851] Alt. Comm. Module Programming ........................... 39/66
[898] Wireless Device Enrollment ..................................... 39/66
[899] Template Programming............................................. 39/66
[900] Panel Version ............................................................ 39/66
[904]-[907] Wireless Device Placement Test ..................... 39/66
[908] Wireless Modules...................................................... 39/66
[990] Installer Lockout Enable ........................................... 39/66
[991] Installer Lockout Disable.......................................... 39/66
[992] Alt. Comm/Ethernet Module Label Broadcast ......... 39/66
[996] Restore Wireless Device Default Programming ....... 39/66
[998] Restore Panel Default Programming ........................ 39/66
[999] Restore Factory Default Programming ..................... 39/66
Local Keypad Programming............................................... 40/66
[000] Keypad Function Key Programming ........................ 40/66
[001]-[064] Label Programming (Zone 1-64) .................... 40/68
[065] Fire Alarm Label ....................................................... 42/69
[066] Fail to Arm Event Message....................................... 42/69
[067] Alarm When Armed Event Message......................... 42/70
[074] First Keypad Options ................................................ 42/70
[075] Second Keypad Options............................................ 42/70
[076] Third Keypad Options............................................... 42/71
[077] Programmed LCD Message...................................... 42/71
[078] Programmed LCD Message Duration....................... 43/71
[100] CO Detector Alarm Label
........................................... 43
/
71
[101] System Label
.............................................................. 43
/
71
[120]-[121] Command Output Labels
.................................. 43
/
71
[996] Reset Programmable Labels to Factory Defaults
........ 43
/
71
[997] Keypad Version
.......................................................... 43
/
71
[998] Initiate Global Label Broadcast
.................................. 43
/
71
[999] Reset All Keypad Programming To Factory Defaults
.43
/
71 Advanced Programming
21
Programming Worksheets
[001]-[004] Zone Definitions
[005] System Timers
i
Unless indicated otherwise, default values apply to NA and CP-01.
SIA FAR CP-01 defaults are indicated in gray. e.g.,

or 030
00
Null Zone (Not Used)
14
24 Hour Heat*
27-30 Future Use
01
Delay 1*
15
24 Hour Medical*
31 Day Zone
02
Delay 2*
16
24 Hour Panic*
32 Instant Stay/Away*
03
Instant*
17
24 Hour Emergency*
33 Future Use
04
Interior*
18
Future Use
34 Future Use
05
Interior, Stay/Away*
19
24 Hour Water*
35 Future Use
06
Delay, Stay/Away*
20
24 Hour Freeze*
36 24 Hr. Non-Latching Tamper
07-08
Future Use
21
Future Use
37 Night Zone*
09
24 Hour Supervisory (Hardwired)
22
Momentary Keyswitch Arm*
81 24-Hour Carbon Monoxide (Wireless)
**
10
24 Hour Supervisory Buzzer*
23
Maintained Keyswitch Arm (Hardwired)*
82 Future Use
11
24 Hour Burglary*
24
Future Use
87 Delayed 24 Hr. Fire (Wireless)
**
12
Future Use
25
Interior Delay*
88 Standard 24 Hr. Fire (Wireless)
**
13
24 Hour Gas*
26
24-hour Non-Alarm (Local Alarm)
89 Auto-verified 24 Hr. Fire (Wireless)
**
*For burglary applications only
** For residential fire applications only
Section Zone Default
Section Zone Default
Section Zone Default
Section Zone Default
[001]
01
01
I_____I_____I
[001]
09
00
I_____I_____I
[002]
17
00
I_____I_____I
[002]
25
00
I_____I_____I
02
03
I_____I_____I
10
00
I_____I_____I
18
00
I_____I_____I
26
00
I_____I_____I
03
03
I_____I_____I
11
00
I_____I_____I
19 00
I_____I_____I
27
00
I_____I_____I
04
03
I_____I_____I
12
00
I_____I_____I
20
00
I_____I_____I
28
00
I_____I_____I
05
04
I_____I_____I
13
00
I_____I_____I
21
00
I_____I_____I
29
00
I_____I_____I
06
04
I_____I_____I
14
00
I_____I_____I
22
00
I_____I_____I
30
00
I_____I_____I
07
04
I_____I_____I
15
00
I_____I_____I
23
00
I_____I_____I
31
00
I_____I_____I
08
04
I_____I_____I
16
00
I_____I_____I
24
00
I_____I_____I
32
00
I_____I_____I
Section Zone Default
Section Zone Default
Section Zone Default
Section Zone Default
[003]
33
00
I_____I_____I
[003]
41
00
I_____I_____I
[004]
49
00
I_____I_____I
[004]
57
00
I_____I_____I
34
00
I_____I_____I
42
00
I_____I_____I
50
00
I_____I_____I
58
00
I_____I_____I
35
00
I_____I_____I
43
00
I_____I_____I
51
00
I_____I_____I
59
00
I_____I_____I
36
00
I_____I_____I
44
00
I_____I_____I
52
00
I_____I_____I
60
00
I_____I_____I
37
00
I_____I_____I
45
00
I_____I_____I
53
00
I_____I_____I
61
00
I_____I_____I
38
00
I_____I_____I
46
00
I_____I_____I
54
00
I_____I_____I
62
00
I_____I_____I
39
00
I_____I_____I
47
00
I_____I_____I
55
00
I_____I_____I
63
00
I_____I_____I
40
00
I_____I_____I
48
00
I_____I_____I
56
00
I_____I_____I
64
00
I_____I_____I
Valid entries for Entry Delay are between 030-255. Valid entries for SIA CP-01 Exit Delay is between 045-255.
Sub Sect.
Default
[01]
Entry Delay 1
030
I___I___I___I
Entry Delay 2
045 030 I___I___I___I
Exit Delay
120 060 I___I___I___I
[09]
Bell Time-out (BTO) 004
I___I___I___I Enter 3 digits from 001-255 (minutes)
i
If the Exit Delay is silent (section 14, option 6 or Stay Function Key Arming), the exit delay is twice the programmed
value but will not exceed 255 seconds (090-255 seconds).
i
For UL installations, the Entry Delay plus the Communications Delay must not exceed 60 seconds.
[006] Installer Code
[007] Master Code
[008] Maintenance Code
Default
Default
Default
555555

I
_______I_______I_______I_______I_______I_______I
123456

I
_______I_______I_______I_______I_______I_______I
AAAA00

I
_______I_______I_______I_______I_______I_______I
i

These codes are 4 or 6-digits (programmed in section [701] Opt.[5]. For 4-digit codes, the default is the first 4 digits. SCW9055/9057 Wireless Alarm System
22
[009] PGM Programming
[012] Keypad Lockout Options
[013] First System Options
[014] Second System Options
[015] Third System Options
Programmable Output Options
00
Null PGM (Not Used)
01
Residential Burglary and Fire Bell Output
02-04
Future Use
05
System Armed Status
06
Ready To Arm
07
Keypad Buzzer Follower
08
Courtesy Pulse
09
System Trouble Output (with Trouble Options)
10
System Event Output (with Event Options)
11
System Tamper (all sources: zones, keypad)
12
TLM and Alarm
13-16
Future Use
17
Away Armed Status
18
Stay Armed Status
19
Command Output #1 ([
*
][7][1])
20
Command Output #2 ([
*
][7][2])
21-40
Future Use
Default
00
I_______I_______I
PGM 1
Enter PGM Definition
00
I_______I_______I
PGM 2
Enter PGM Definition
Default
000
I_______I_______I______I
Number of Invalid Codes Before Lockout
(Valid entries are 000-255)
000
I_______I_______I______I
Lockout Duration (in minutes)
(Valid entries are 000-255)
i
If Keypad Lockout is active, the panel cannot be disarmed with a keyswitch.
Opt Def.
ON
OFF
1


Hardwired Zone 33 Input Enabled

PGM1 Output Enabled
2


Hardwired Zone 34 Input Enabled

PGM2 Output Enabled
3-5

Future Use
6

Audible Exit Fault Enabled


Audible Exit Fault Disabled
7

Future Use
8

Temporal Three Fire Signal Enabled


Standard Pulsed Fire Signal
Opt Def.
ON
OFF
1

Arm/Disarm Squawk Enabled


Arm/Disarm Squawk Disabled
2

Future Use
3

RF Jam Log After 5 Minutes


RF Jam Logs After 20 seconds
4

Aux Boost Enabled


Aux Boost Disabled
5

Future Use
6


Audible Exit With Urgency

Silent Exit Delay
7

Future Use
8

Fire Bell is Continuous


Fire Bell Follows Bell Cut-off
Opt Def.
ON
OFF
1


[F] Key Enabled

[F] Key Disabled
2

[P] Key Audible (Siren/Beeps)


[P] Key Silent
3


Quick Exit Enabled

Quick Exit Disabled
4


Quick Arming Enabled ([

][0] and Function Keys)

Quick Arming Disabled (Function Key Requires Code)
5

Code Required for Bypassing


No Code Required
6

Master Code Not Changeable


Master Code Changeable
7


TLM Enabled

TLM Disabled
8

System Tamper Enabled


System Tamper Disabled Advanced Programming
23
[016] Fourth System Options
[018] Sixth System Options
[023] Tenth System Options
[024] Eleventh System Options
[
030] Zone Loop Response Options
Opt Def.
ON
OFF
1

Cross Zoning Enabled


Police Code Enabled
2


Exit Delay Restart Enabled


Exit Delay Restart Disabled
3

Blank Keypad When Not Used


Keypad Always Active
4

Code Required to Remove Keypad Blanking


No Code Required
5


Keypad Backlighting Enabled

Keypad Backlighting Disabled
6

Future Use
7

Bypass Status Displayed While Armed


Bypass Status Not Displayed While Armed
8

Daylight Saving Time Enabled


Daylight Saving Time Disabled
Opt Def.
ON
OFF
1

Future Use
2

Keypad Tampers Enabled


Keypad Tampers Disabled
3-4

Future Use
5

Keypad Buzzer Follows Siren Enabled


Keypad Buzzer Follows Siren Disabled
6-8

Future Use
Opt Def.
ON
OFF
1

Chime On Openings Enabled

Chime On Openings Disabled
2

Chime On Closings Enabled

Chime On Closings Disabled
3

Test Transmission While Armed Only

Test Transmission while Armed/Disarmed
4

Test Transmission Counter In Hours

Test Transmission Counter In Days
5

Switching from Away to Stay Disabled

Away to Stay Toggle Option Permitted
6

New Alarms will not Disconnect 2-Way Audio

New Alarms Disconnect 2-Way Audio
7

Trouble Beeps are Silent

Trouble Beeps Sound Every 10 seconds
8

Keyswitch Arms In Away Only

Keyswitch Arms In Stay or Away
Opt Def.
ON
OFF
1

Temperature Display Enabled

Temperature Display Disabled
2

Temperature Displayed in Celsius
 
Temperature Displayed In Fahrenheit
3

Internal Siren Enabled

Internal Siren Disabled
4

Inactivity Monitored By All Zones

Inactivity Monitored Only By 24 Hr Non-Alarm Zones
5

Enable Realtime Clock

Disable Realtime Clock
6-8

Future Use
Opt Def.
ON
OFF
1

Zone 33 is Fast Loop Response

Zone 33 is Normal Loop Response
2

Zone 34 is Fast Loop Response

Zone 34 is Normal Loop Response SCW9055/9057 Wireless Alarm System
24
[101]-[164] Zone Attributes
Options 9 and 10 do not apply to SCW9055 versions. Options 14, 15 and 16 apply to hardwired zones only (zones 33 & 34) when use
d
as hardwired zones. To program attributes 9 to 16, press 9 within the zone attribute section. Press 9 again to program attributes 1 to 8.
Zone Attribute Defaults
[167] Alt. Comm. Communications Wait For Ack
Default 060
I_______I_______I_______I
Valid entries are 060-255 seconds
[170] PGM Output Timer
Default 005
I_______I_______I_______I
Valid entries are 001-255 seconds
Attribute:
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
14
15
16


=ON
Zone Type:
Audible Steady Chime Bypass Force Swing
Tx.
Delay
Cross Zn
2-way
Audio
Talk-
Listen
NC SEOL DEOL
OFF
Silent Pulsed
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
Loops
00 Null Zone
01 Delay 1
 

 
02 Delay 2
 

 
03 Instant
 

 
04 Interior
  

 
05 Interior Stay/Away
 

 
06 Delay Stay/Away
 

 
07-08 Future Use
09 24-hr. Superv. (Hardwired)



10 24-hr. Superv. Buzzer


 
11 24-hr. Burglary
 

 
12 Future Use
13 24-hr. Gas


 
14 24-hr. Heat



15 24-hr. Medical


 
16 24-hr. Panic


 
17 24-hr. Emergency


 
18 Future Use
19 24-hr. Water


 
20 24-hr. Freeze


 
21 Future Use
22 Momentary Keyswitch Arm

23 Maintained Keyswitch Arm

24 Future Use
25 Interior Delay
 

 
26 24-hr. Non-Alarm (local alarm)

27-30 Future Use
31 Day Zone
 


32 Instant Stay/Away
  

 
33-34 Future Use
35 Future Use
36 24-hr. Non-Latching Tamper



37 Night Zone
 



81 24-hr. Carbon Monoxide
(Wireless)

87 Delay 24-hr. Fire (Wireless)

88 Standard 24-hr. Fire (Wire-
less)

89 Auto-Verified Fire (Wireless)

* For UL installations, do not change attribute 5 (Force Arming) from the default setting. For CP-01 installations: Option 6 (Swinger) is defaulted ON for zone
definitions 09-11, 13-17, 19, 20. Option 7 (Tx Delay) is defaulted ON for zone definitions 01-06, 09-11, 13-17, 19, 20, 25, 32, 36, 37.
[168] Daylight Saving Time Begin
[169] Daylight Saving Time End
Default
Default
003
Month
|
_______|_______|_______| V
alid Entries 001-012
011
Month
|
_______|_______|_______| V
alid Entries 001-012
0 0 2
W e e k
|_______|_______|_______| V
alid Entries 000-005
001
Week
|
_______|_______|_______| V
alid Entries 000-005
0 0 0
D a y
|_______|_______|_______| V
alid Entries 000-031
000
Day
|
_______|_______|_______| V
alid Entries 000-031
002
Hour
|
_______|_______|_______| V
alid Entries 000-023
002
Hour
|
_______|_______|_______| V
alid Entries 000-023
001
Increment |
_______|_______|_______| V
alid Entries 001-002
001
Decrement |
_______|_______|_______| V
alid Entries 001-002 Advanced Programming
25
[176] Cross Zone/Police Code Timer
Default 060
I_______I_______I_______I
Valid entries are 001-255 seconds/minutes
[190] No Activity Arming Pre-alert Timer
Default 001
I_______I_______I_______I
Note:
Not CP-01 compliant
Valid entries are 001-255 minutes, 000 for no pre-alert
[191] No Activity Arming Timer
Default 000
I_______I_______I_______I
Note:
Not CP-01 compliant
Valid entries are 001-255 minutes, 000 to disable
[202] - [209] Zone Assignments
Communications
[304] Call Waiting Cancel String (6 Digits)
-
This feature is activated in Section 382 Opt 4
I_____I_____I_____I_____I_____I_____I
Default = DB70EF Program unused digits with Hex F
[305] Fourth Telephone Number (32 Digits)
[310] System Account Code
Enter a 4 or 6-digit account number for the system account code. Only SIA supports 6-digit account codes. If a 4-digit code is used, pro-
gram the last two digits of the account code with FF.
Default = FFFFFF
I_______I_______I_______I_______I_______I_______I
[202] Zone 1-8
[203] Zones 9-16
[204] Zones 17-24
[205] Zones 25-32
[206] Zones 33-40
Opt Def.
Def.
Def.
Def.
Def.
1

Zone 1

Zone 9

Zone 17

Zone 25

Zone 33
2

Zone 2

Zone 10

Zone 18

Zone 26

Zone 34
3

Zone 3

Zone 11

Zone 19

Zone 27

Zone 35
4

Zone 4

Zone 12

Zone 20

Zone 28

Zone 36
5

Zone 5

Zone 13

Zone 21

Zone 29

Zone 37
6

Zone 6

Zone 14

Zone 22

Zone 30

Zone 38
7

Zone 7

Zone 15

Zone 23

Zone 31

Zone 39
8

Zone 8

Zone 16

Zone 24

Zone 32

Zone 40
[207] Zone 41-48
[208] Zones 49-56 [209] Zones 57-64
Opt Def.
Def.
Def.
1

Zone 41

Zone 49

Zone 57
2

Zone 42

Zone 50

Zone 58
3

Zone 43

Zone 51

Zone 59
4

Zone 44

Zone 52

Zone 60
5

Zone 45

Zone 53

Zone 61
6

Zone 46

Zone 54

Zone 62
7

Zone 47

Zone 55

Zone 63
8

Zone 48

Zone 56

Zone 64
[301] First Telephone Number (32 Digits)

I__
D
_I_____I_____I_____I_____I_____I_____I_____I_____I_____I_____I_____I_____I_____I_____I_____I_____I_____I_____I_____I_____I_____I_____I_____I_____I_____I_____I_____I_____I_____I_____I_____I
[302] Second Telephone Number (32 Digits)

I__
D
_I_____I_____I_____I_____I_____I_____I_____I_____I_____I_____I_____I_____I_____I_____I_____I_____I_____I_____I_____I_____I_____I_____I_____I_____I_____I_____I_____I_____I_____I_____I_____I
[303] Third Telephone Number (32 Digits)

I__
D
_I_____I_____I_____I_____I_____I_____I_____I_____I_____I_____I_____I_____I_____I_____I_____I_____I_____I_____I_____I_____I_____I_____I_____I_____I_____I_____I_____I_____I_____I_____I_____I
i
All six digits must be entered for changes to be saved in Section [304] and Section [310]. Fill unused digit spaces with “F.”
I__
D
_I_____I_____I_____I_____I_____I_____I_____I_____I_____I_____I_____I_____I_____I_____I_____I_____I_____I_____I_____I_____I_____I_____I_____I_____I_____I_____I_____I_____I_____I_____I_____I SCW9055/9057 Wireless Alarm System
26
Reporting Codes
[320]-[323] Alarm Reporting Codes, Zones 01-64
[324]-[327] Alarm Restore Reporting Codes, Zones 01-64
[328] Miscellaneous Alarm Reporting Codes

i
All Reporting Codes are defaulted “FF” unless indicated otherwise.
Section
Default: FF
[320]
Zone 01
Zone 02
Zone 03
Zone 04
Zone 05
Zone 06
Zone 07
Zone 08
|___|___|
|___|___|
|___|___|
|___|___|
|___|___|
|___|___|
|___|___|
|___|___|
Zone 09
Zone 10
Zone 11
Zone 12
Zone 13
Zone 14
Zone 15
Zone 16
|___|___|
|___|___|
|___|___|
|___|___|
|___|___|
|___|___|
|___|___|
|___|___|
[321]
Zone 17
Zone 18
Zone 19
Zone 20
Zone 21
Zone 22
Zone 23
Zone 24
|___|___|
|___|___|
|___|___|
|___|___|
|___|___|
|___|___|
|___|___|
|___|___|
Zone 25
Zone 26
Zone 27
Zone 28
Zone 29
Zone 30
Zone 31
Zone 32
|___|___|
|___|___|
|___|___|
|___|___|
|___|___|
|___|___|
|___|___|
|___|___|
[322]
Zone 33
Zone 34
Zone 35
Zone 36
Zone 37
Zone 38
Zone 39
Zone 40
|___|___|
|___|___|
|___|___|
|___|___|
|___|___|
|___|___|
|___|___|
|___|___|
Zone 41
Zone 42
Zone 43
Zone 44
Zone 45
Zone 46
Zone 47
Zone 48
|___|___|
|___|___|
|___|___|
|___|___|
|___|___|
|___|___|
|___|___|
|___|___|
[323]
Zone 49
Zone 50
Zone 51
Zone 52
Zone 53
Zone 54
Zone 55
Zone 56
|___|___|
|___|___|
|___|___|
|___|___|
|___|___|
|___|___|
|___|___|
|___|___|
Zone 57
Zone 58
Zone 59
Zone 60
Zone 61
Zone 62
Zone 63
Zone 64
|___|___|
|___|___|
|___|___|
|___|___|
|___|___|
|___|___|
|___|___|
|___|___|
Section
Default: FF
[324]
Zone 01
Zone 02
Zone 03
Zone 04
Zone 05
Zone 06
Zone 07
Zone 08
|___|___|
|___|___|
|___|___|
|___|___|
|___|___|
|___|___|
|___|___|
|___|___|
Zone 09
Zone 10
Zone 11
Zone 12
Zone 13
Zone 14
Zone 15
Zone 16
|___|___|
|___|___|
|___|___|
|___|___|
|___|___|
|___|___|
|___|___|
|___|___|
[325]
Zone 17
Zone 18
Zone 19
Zone 20
Zone 21
Zone 22
Zone 23
Zone 24
|___|___|
|___|___|
|___|___|
|___|___|
|___|___|
|___|___|
|___|___|
|___|___|
Zone 25
Zone 26
Zone 27
Zone 28
Zone 29
Zone 30
Zone 31
Zone 32
|___|___|
|___|___|
|___|___|
|___|___|
|___|___|
|___|___|
|___|___|
|___|___|
[326]
Zone 33
Zone 34
Zone 35
Zone 36
Zone 37
Zone 38
Zone 39
Zone 40
|___|___|
|___|___|
|___|___|
|___|___|
|___|___|
|___|___|
|___|___|
|___|___|
Zone 41
Zone 42
Zone 43
Zone 44
Zone 45
Zone 46
Zone 47
Zone 48
|___|___|
|___|___|
|___|___|
|___|___|
|___|___|
|___|___|
|___|___|
|___|___|
[327]
Zone 49
Zone 50
Zone 51
Zone 52
Zone 53
Zone 54
Zone 55
Zone 56
|___|___|
|___|___|
|___|___|
|___|___|
|___|___|
|___|___|
|___|___|
|___|___|
Zone 57
Zone 58
Zone 59
Zone 60
Zone 61
Zone 62
Zone 63
Zone 64
|___|___|
|___|___|
|___|___|
|___|___|
|___|___|
|___|___|
|___|___|
|___|___|
|___|___|
Duress Alarm
|___|___|
Opening After Alarm
|___|___|
Recent Closing
|___|___|
Future Use
|___|___|
Future Use
|___|___|
Cross Zone/Police Code Alarm
|___|___|
Burglary Not Verified
|___|___|
Alarm Canceled Advanced Programming
27
[329] Priority Alarm and Restore Reporting Codes
[330]-[333] Tamper Reporting Codes, Zones 01-64
[334]-[337] Tamper Restore Reporting Codes, Zones 01-64
[338] Miscellaneous Tamper Reporting Codes
[339] Closing (Arming) Reporting Codes, Access Codes 1-16
|___|___|
Keypad [F] Fire Alarm
|___|___|
Keypad [A] Auxiliary Alarm
|___|___|
Keypad [P] Panic Alarm
|___|___|
Fail to Report In
|___|___|
Keypad [F] Fire Restore
|___|___|
Keypad [A] Auxiliary Restore
|___|___|
Keypad [P] Panic Restore
|___|___|
Future Use
Section
Default: FF
[330]
Zone 01
Zone 02
Zone 03
Zone 04
Zone 05
Zone 06
Zone 07
Zone 08
|___|___|
|___|___|
|___|___|
|___|___|
|___|___|
|___|___|
|___|___|
|___|___|
Zone 09
Zone 10
Zone 11
Zone 12
Zone 13
Zone 14
Zone 15
Zone 16
|___|___|
|___|___|
|___|___|
|___|___|
|___|___|
|___|___|
|___|___|
|___|___|
[331]
Zone 17
Zone 18
Zone 19
Zone 20
Zone 21
Zone 22
Zone 23
Zone 24
|___|___|
|___|___|
|___|___|
|___|___|
|___|___|
|___|___|
|___|___|
|___|___|
Zone 25
Zone 26
Zone 27
Zone 28
Zone 29
Zone 30
Zone 31
Zone 32
|___|___|
|___|___|
|___|___|
|___|___|
|___|___|
|___|___|
|___|___|
|___|___|
[332]
Zone 33
Zone 34
Zone 35
Zone 36
Zone 37
Zone 38
Zone 39
Zone 40
|___|___|
|___|___|
|___|___|
|___|___|
|___|___|
|___|___|
|___|___|
|___|___|
Zone 41
Zone 42
Zone 43
Zone 44
Zone 45
Zone 46
Zone 47
Zone 48
|___|___|
|___|___|
|___|___|
|___|___|
|___|___|
|___|___|
|___|___|
|___|___|
[333]
Zone 49
Zone 50
Zone 51
Zone 52
Zone 53
Zone 54
Zone 55
Zone 56
|___|___|
|___|___|
|___|___|
|___|___|
|___|___|
|___|___|
|___|___|
|___|___|
Zone 57
Zone 58
Zone 59
Zone 60
Zone 61
Zone 62
Zone 63
Zone 64
|___|___|
|___|___|
|___|___|
|___|___|
|___|___|
|___|___|
|___|___|
|___|___|
Section
Default: FF
[334]
Zone 01
Zone 02
Zone 03
Zone 04
Zone 05
Zone 06
Zone 07
Zone 08
|___|___|
|___|___|
|___|___|
|___|___|
|___|___|
|___|___|
|___|___|
|___|___|
Zone 09
Zone 10
Zone 11
Zone 12
Zone 13
Zone 14
Zone 15
Zone 16
|___|___|
|___|___|
|___|___|
|___|___|
|___|___|
|___|___|
|___|___|
|___|___|
[335]
Zone 17
Zone 18
Zone 19
Zone 20
Zone 21
Zone 22
Zone 23
Zone 24
|___|___|
|___|___|
|___|___|
|___|___|
|___|___|
|___|___|
|___|___|
|___|___|
Zone 25
Zone 26
Zone 27
Zone 28
Zone 29
Zone 30
Zone 31
Zone 32
|___|___|
|___|___|
|___|___|
|___|___|
|___|___|
|___|___|
|___|___|
|___|___|
[336]
Zone 33
Zone 34
Zone 35
Zone 36
Zone 37
Zone 38
Zone 39
Zone 40
|___|___|
|___|___|
|___|___|
|___|___|
|___|___|
|___|___|
|___|___|
|___|___|
Zone 41
Zone 42
Zone 43
Zone 44
Zone 45
Zone 46
Zone 47
Zone 48
|___|___|
|___|___|
|___|___|
|___|___|
|___|___|
|___|___|
|___|___|
|___|___|
[337]
Zone 49
Zone 50
Zone 51
Zone 52
Zone 53
Zone 54
Zone 55
Zone 56
|___|___|
|___|___|
|___|___|
|___|___|
|___|___|
|___|___|
|___|___|
|___|___|
Zone 57
Zone 58
Zone 59
Zone 60
Zone 61
Zone 62
Zone 63
Zone 64
|___|___|
|___|___|
|___|___|
|___|___|
|___|___|
|___|___|
|___|___|
|___|___|
|___|___|
General System Tamper
|___|___|
General System Tamper Restore
|___|___|
Keypad Lockout
Section
[339]
Code 1
Code 2
Code 3
Code 4
Code 5
Code 6
Code 7
Code 8
|___|___|
|___|___|
|___|___|
|___|___|
|___|___|
|___|___|
|___|___|
|___|___|
Code 9
Code 10
Code 11
Code 12
Code 13
Code 14
Code 15
Code 16
|___|___|
|___|___|
|___|___|
|___|___|
|___|___|
|___|___|
|___|___|
|___|___| SCW9055/9057 Wireless Alarm System
28
[341] Miscellaneous Closing (Arming) Reporting Codes
[342] Opening (Disarming) Reporting Codes, Access Codes 1-16
[344] Miscellaneous Opening (Disarming) Reporting Codes

[350] Communicator Format Options
*Failure to communicate using Residential Dial will not generate an FTC trouble. 3
rd
phone number follows the format of the 1
st
if config-
ured for alternate dial.

|___|___|
Closing by Master Code 40
|___|___|
Automatic Zone Bypass
|___|___|
Partial Closing
|___|___|
Special Closing
|___|___|
Exit Fault
Code 1
Code 2
Code 3
Code 4
Code 5
Code 6
Code 7
Code 8
|___|___| |___|___|
|___|___|
|___|___|
|___|___|
|___|___|
|___|___|
|___|___|
Code 9
Code 10
Code 11
Code 12
Code 13
Code 14
Code 15
Code 16
|___|___| |___|___|
|___|___|
|___|___|
|___|___|
|___|___|
|___|___|
|___|___|
|___|___|
Opening by Master Code 40
|___|___|
Special Opening
|___|___|
Late to Open
[345] Maintenance Alarm Reporting Codes
[346] Maintenance Restore Reporting Codes
|___|___|
Battery Trouble Alarm
|___|___|
Battery Trouble Restore
|___|___|
AC Failure Trouble Alarm
|___|___|
AC Failure Trouble Restore
|___|___|
Future Use
|___|___|
Future Use
|___|___|
Fire Trouble Alarm
|___|___|
Fire Trouble Restore
|___|___|
Auxiliary Power Supply Trouble Alarm
|___|___|
Auxiliary Power Supply Trouble Restore
|_0_|_0_|
TLM Alarm
|___|___|
TLM Restore
|___|___|
General System Trouble
|___|___|
General System Trouble Restore
|___|___|
General System Supervisory Trouble
|___|___|
General System Supervisory Restore
|_0_|_0_|
System Reset (Cold Start)
[347] Miscellaneous Maintenance Reporting Codes
[348] Test Transmission Reporting Codes
|___|___|
Telephone Number 1 FTC Restore
|___|___|
Walk Test End
|___|___|
Telephone Number 2 FTC Restore
|___|___|
Walk Test Begin
|___|___|
Future Use
|___|___|
Future Use
|_0_|_0_|
DLS Lead IN
|___|___|
Periodic Test Transmission
|_0_|_0_|
DLS Lead OUT
|___|___|
System Test
|___|___|
General Zone Fault Alarm
|___|___|
General Zone Fault Restore
|___|___|
Delinquency Reporting Code
|___|___|
General Zone Low Battery Alarm
|___|___|
General Zone Low Battery Restore
|_0_|_0_|
Installer Lead Out
|_0_|_0_|
Installer Lead In
|___|___|
Telephone number 3 FTC Restore
|___|___|
Telephone number 4 FTC Restore
|___|___|
Panel Firmware Update Begin
|___|___|
Panel Firmware Update Successful
1st Telephone Number
2nd Telephone Number
3rd Telephone Number
4th Telephone Number
Default
04
|___|___|
Default
04
|___|___|
Default
04 |___|___|
Default
04
|___|___|
01 20 BPS, 1400 Hz
02 20 BPS, 2300 Hz
03 DTMF Contact ID
04 SIA FSK
05 Future Use
06* Residential Dial Advanced Programming
29
Call Direction Options
[351] Alarm/Restore Communicator Call Directions
[359] Tamper/Restore Communicator Call Directions
[367] Opening/Closing Communicator Call Directions

[375] System Maintenance Communicator Call Directions

[376] System Test Transmissions Communicator Call Directions

[377] Communication Variables
†Dependent on programming in section [382], option [6].
††Dependent on programming in section [023], option [4].
†††Dependent on programming in section [380], option [8]
.
[378] Test Transmission Time of Day
Default
Option 1
First Telephone
Number (Default ON)
Option 2
Second Telephone
Number (Default OFF)
Option 3
Third Telephone
Number (Default OFF)
Option 4
Fourth Telephone
Number (Default OFF)
Option 5-8
Future Use
(Default OFF)

Option 1
First Telephone
Number (Default ON)
Option 2
Second Telephone
Number (Default OFF)
Option 3
Third Telephone
Number (Default OFF)
Option 4
Fourth Telephone
Number (Default OFF)
Option 5-8
Future Use
(Default OFF)

Option 1
First Telephone
Number (Default OFF)
Option 2
Second Telephone
Number (Default OFF)
Option 3
Third Telephone
Number (Default OFF)
Option 4
Fourth Telephone
Number (Default OFF)
Option 5-8
Future Use
(Default OFF)

Option 1
First Telephone
Number (Default ON)
Option 2
Second Telephone
Number (Default OFF)
Option 3
Third Telephone
Number (Default OFF)
Option 4
Fourth Telephone
Number (Default OFF)
Option 5-8
Future Use
(Default OFF)

Option 1
First Telephone
Number (Default ON)
Option 2
Second Telephone
Number (Default OFF)
Option 3
Third Telephone
Number (Default OFF)
Option 4
Fourth Telephone
Number (Default OFF)
Option 5-8
Future Use
(Default OFF)

Default
003 002
I_______I______I_______I

Swinger Shutdown (Alarms and Rest)
001-014 Transmissions, 000=disabled
003
I_______I______I_______I

Swinger Shutdown (Tampers and Rest)
001-014 Transmissions, 000=disabled
003
I_______I______I_______I

Swinger Shutdown (Maint. and Rest)
001-014 Transmissions, 000=disabled
000
030
I_______I______I_______I

Communication Delay
000-255 seconds, 000 = No Delay
030
I_______I______I_______I

AC Failure Communication Delay
001-255 minutes/hours, 000=disabled†
010
I_______I______I_______I

TLM Trouble Delay
003-255 seconds x3 (e.g.,003 = 9 seconds)
030
I_______I______I_______I

Test Transmission Cycle (land line)
001-255 days/hours††
060
I_______I______I_______I

Future Use
007
I_______I______I_______I

Wireless Device Low Battery Transmis-
sion Delay
000-255 days
030
I_______I______I_______I

Delinquency Transmission Delay
000-255 days/hours†††, 000=disabled
000
005
I_______I______I_______I

Communications Canceled Window
000-255 minutes
i
For UL installations, the Entry Delay plus Communication Delay time must not exceed 60 seconds.

9999

I_______I_______I_______I_______I

Valid entries are 0000-2359 (9999 to disable) SCW9055/9057 Wireless Alarm System
30
[380] First Communicator Options
[381] Second Communicator Options
[382] Third Communicator Options
*This option must remain OFF for CP-01 installations.
** A Call Waiting Cancel on a non-Call Waiting line will prevent successful connection to the central station.
Opt Def.
ON
OFF
1


Communications Enabled

Communications Disabled
2

Restores on Siren Time-out


Restores Follow Zones
3

Pulse Dialing


DTMF Dialing
4

Future Use
5

Future Use
6

Alternating Backup Dialing Enabled


Call Primary Number, Backup to Secondary
7

Future Use
8

Delinquency Follows Zone Activity (Hours)


Delinquency Follows Arming (Days)
Opt Def.
ON
OFF
1

Opening After Alarm Keypad Ringback Enabled

Opening After Alarm Ringback Disabled
2

Future Use
3

SIA Uses Programmed Reporting Codes


SIA Uses Automatic Reporting Codes
4

Closing Confirmation Enabled


Closing Confirmation Disabled
5

Future Use
6

Future Use
7

Contact ID Uses Programmed Reporting Codes


Contact ID Uses Automatic Reporting Codes
8

Future Use
Opt Def.
ON
OFF
1

Future Use
2

Alarm Communications Enabled During Walk Test*


Alarm Communications Disabled During Walk
Test
3


Communication Canceled Message Enabled


Communication Canceled Message Disabled
4

Call Waiting Cancel Enabled**


Call Waiting Cancel Disabled
5

Alt. Comm. Module Enabled (On for G/D/I models only)


Alt. Comm. Module Disabled
6

AC Failure Transmission Delay Is In Hours


AC Failure Transmission Delay is in Minutes
7

Number of Dialing Attempts is 1 for Residential Dial


Residential Dialing Attempts is 5
8

Future Use Advanced Programming
31
[383] Fourth Communicator Options
[389] Alt. Comm. Fault Check Timer
DLS Downloading
[401] First Downloading Options
[402] DLS Downloading Computer’s Telephone Number (32 Digits)
|___
D
__|_______|_______|_______|_______|_______|_______|_______|_______|_______|_______|_______|_______|_______|_______|_______|
|________|_______|_______|_______|_______|_______|_______|_______|_______|_______|_______|_______|_______|_______|_______|_______|
[403] DLS Downloading Access Code / Panel ID Code (Enter 6 Hexadecimal Digits)
[404] Panel ID Code (Enter 6 Hexadecimal Digits)
[405] Double Call Timer
Default 030
I_______I_______I_______I
Valid entries are 001-255, (000 to disable)
[406] Number of Rings To Answer On
Default 000
I_______I_______I_______I
Valid entries are 000-009, (000 to disable)
Opt Def.
ON
OFF
1

Future Use
2

Phone Number 2 Backs Up Number 1

Phone Number 2 is Independent
3

Phone Number 3 Backs Up Number 2

Phone Number 3 is Independent
4

Phone Number 4 Backs Up Number 3


Phone Number 4 is Independent
5

FTC’ed Events Communicate


FTC’ed Events Do Not Communicate
6

Account Code Error Check Enabled

Account Code Error Check Disabled
7

Future Use
8

Remote notification format is SIA


Remote notification format is CID
Def. 005

I_______I_______I_______I

Valid entries are 003-255 x 3 (e.g., 003x3 = 9 seconds.)
Opt Def.
ON
OFF
1

Answering Machine/Double Call Enabled

Answering Machine/Double Call Disabled
2


User Can Enable DLS Window

User Cannot Enable DLS Window
3

Call Back Enabled


Call Back Disabled
4

User Initiated Call Up Enabled

User Initiated Call Up Disabled
5

Future Use
6

300 Baud Panel Call up


110 Baud Panel Call up
7

Future Use
8


Alternate Communicator DLS Always

Alternate Communicator Follows DLS Window
|_______|_______|_______|_______|_______|_______|
Default = 905500 ; For SCW9057 = 905700
|_______|_______|_______|_______|_______|_______|
Default = 905500 ; For SCW9057 = 905700 SCW9055/9057 Wireless Alarm System
32
[501]-[502] PGM Output Attributes
Program only the following attributes for the PGM options listed. All others are ignored.
[591-592] Inactivity Timers 1 & 2 Start and End Times
Attribute:


= ON
PGM Option
123 4 5 6 78
Not Used
Not
Used
True Output
Follows
Timer
Code Req.
Not
Used
Not
Used
Not Used
OFF
-
-
Inverted
ON/OFF
No Code
No
No
No
00
Null PGM
01
Burglary and Fire Siren Output

02-04
Future Use
05
Armed Status

06
Ready To Arm

07
Keypad Buzzer Follow

08
Courtesy Pulse

09
System Trouble Output (with
trouble options)
  
10
System Event (with event
options)
  
11
System Tamper (all sources)

12
TLM and Alarm

13-16
Future Use
17
Away Armed Status

18
Stay Armed Status

19
Command Output #1 (*71)

20
Command Output #2 (*72)

21-39
Future Use
Attribute:
ON
123 4 5 6 78
Service
Req. Event
AC Fail
TLM Fault
FTC
Device
Fault
Device
Tamper
Device
Low
Loss of
Clock
OFF
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled Disabled Disabled
09 System Trouble
  
Attribute:
ON
123 4 5 6 78
Burg.
Event
Fire
Event
Panic Event
Medical
Event
Supervi-
sory Event
Priority
Event
Duress
Event
Follows
Timer
Latched
OFF
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled Disabled Disabled
10 System Event
  
Section
PGM
PGM Type
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
[501]
1
I___I___I
I___I___I I___I___I
I___I___I
I___I___I
I___I___I I___I___I I___I___I I___I___I
[502]
2
I___I___I
I___I___I I___I___I
I___I___I
I___I___I
I___I___I I___I___I I___I___I I___I___I
Section
Default Start Time
Default End Time
Valid times are
00:00-23:59 hours.
9999 to disable
[591]
Timer #1 9999

I_______I_______I_______I_______I

9999

I_______I_______I_______I_______I

[592]
Timer #2 9999

I_______I_______I_______I_______I

9999

I_______I_______I_______I_______I
Advanced Programming
33
[600] 2-way Audio Control Options 1
[601] 2-way Audio Control Options 2
[609] Module Tamper Reporting Codes
[610] Alternate Communicator Receiver Trouble Reporting Codes
[611] Repeater Tamper/AC Loss Reporting Code
Opt Def.
ON
OFF
1

Tampers Enabled


Tampers Disabled
2

Openings & Closings Enabled


Openings & Closings Disabled
3


[A] Key Alarm Enabled

[A] Key AlarmDisabled
4


[P] Key Alarm Enabled

[P] Key Alarm Disabled
5


Duress Alarm Enabled (Listen)

Duress Alarm Disabled
6


Opening After Alarm Enabled

Opening After Alarm Disabled
*7

Siren Active during 2-way Audio Verification


Siren Silent during 2-way Audio Verification
8

2-Way Audio Is Initiated By The CS Operator


2-Way Audio Session Is Immediate
* This option must be ON for UL Listed Installations
Opt Def.
ON
OFF
1

Talk/Listen on Phone #1 Enabled*


Talk/Listen on Phone #1 Disabled
2

Talk/Listen on Phone #2 Enabled*


Talk/Listen on Phone #2 Disabled
3

Talk/Listen on Phone #3 Enabled


Talk/Listen on Phone #3 Disabled
4

Talk/Listen on Phone #4 Enabled


Talk/Listen on Phone #4 Disabled
5-8

Future Use
*When using redundant communications with phone line and alternate communicator, if 2-way audio is enabled, a 2-way voice session is
established over both paths at the same time.
I___I___I
Keypad 1 Tamper
I___I___I
Siren 1 Tamper
I___I___I
Keypad 2 Tamper
I___I___I
Siren 2 Tamper
I___I___I
Keypad 3 Tamper
I___I___I
Siren 3 Tamper
I___I___I
Keypad 4 Tamper
I___I___I
Siren 4 Tamper
I___I___I
Keypad 1 Tamper Restore
I___I___I
Siren 1 Tamper Restore
I___I___I
Keypad 2 Tamper Restore
I___I___I
Siren 2 Tamper Restore
I___I___I
Keypad 3 Tamper Restore
I___I___I
Siren 3 Tamper Restore
I___I___I
Keypad 4 Tamper Restore
I___I___I
Siren 4 Tamper Restore
I___I___I
Receiver 1 Trouble
I___I___I
Receiver 1 Trouble Restore
I___I___I
Receiver 2 Trouble
I___I___I
Receiver 2 Trouble Restore
I___I___I
Receiver 3 Trouble
I___I___I
Receiver 3 Trouble Restore
I___I___I
Receiver 4 Trouble
I___I___I
Receiver 4 Trouble Restore
I___I___I
General Alternate Communicator Trouble
I___I___I
General Alternate Communicator Restore
I___I___I
Repeater 1 Tamper
I___I___I
Repeater 1 Tamper Restore
I___I___I
Repeater 2 Tamper
I___I___I
Repeater 2 Tamper Restore
I___I___I
Repeater 3 Tamper
I___I___I
Repeater 3 Tamper Restore
I___I___I
Repeater 4 Tamper
I___I___I
Repeater 4 Tamper Restore
I___I___I
Repeater 1 AC Loss
I___I___I
Repeater 1 AC Loss Restore
I___I___I
Repeater 2 AC Loss
I___I___I
Repeater 2 AC Loss Restore
I___I___I
Repeater 3 AC Loss
I___I___I
Repeater 3 AC Loss Restore
I___I___I
Repeater 4 AC Loss
I___I___I
Repeater 4 AC Loss Restore SCW9055/9057 Wireless Alarm System
34
INTERNATIONAL PROGRAMMING
[700] Automatic Clock Adjust
Default = 60

|______|_______|
Valid Entries 00-99 Seconds
[701] First International Options
[702] Second International Options
[703] Delay Between Dialing Attempts
Default = 003
|_______|_______|_______| V
alid entries are 000-255 seconds (entry + 5 seconds)
[800] Door Chime Options for Zones 1-64
Opt Def.
ON
OFF
1

50 Hz AC

60 Hz AC
2

Time Base - Internal Crystal

Time Base - AC Line
3

AC/DC Arming Inhibit Enabled

AC/DC Arming Inhibit Disabled
4

All System Tampers Require Installer Reset

All System Tampers Follow Restore
5

6-digit User Access Codes

4-digit User Access Codes
6

Busy Tone Detection Enabled

Busy Tone Detection Disabled
7

High Capacity Battery Charge (On for G, D, I)

Standard Capacity Battery Charge
8

Future Use
Opt Def.
ON
OFF
1

Pulse Dialing Make/Break Ratio is 33/67

Pulse Dialing Make/Break Ratio is 40/60
2

Force Dialing Enabled

Force Dialing Disabled
3

Future Use
4

1600Hz Handshake

Standard Handshake
5

ID Tone Enabled

ID Tone Disabled
6

2100 Hz ID Tone

1300 Hz ID Tone
7-8

Future Use
Option
1
2
3
4
Option
1
2
3
4
ON
6 Beeps
Bing Bong Ding Dong Alarm
ON
6 Beeps
Bing Bong Ding Dong Alarm
OFF
Disabled Disabled
Disabled
Disabled
OFF
Disabled Disabled
Disabled
Disabled
Section Zone Default
Default
Default
Default
Section Zone Default
Default
Default
Default
[01]
1
   
[24]
24
   
[02]
2
   
[25]
25
   
[03]
3
   
[26]
26
   
[04]
4
   
[27]
27
   
[05]
5
   
[28]
28
   
[06]
6
   
[29]
29
   
[07]
7
   
[30]
30
   
[08]
8
   
[32]
31
   
[09]
9
   
[32]
32
   
[10]
10
   
[33]
33
   
[11]
11
   
[34]
34
   
[12]
12
   
[35]
35
   
[13]
13
   
[36]
36
   
[14]
14
   
[37]
37
   
[15]
15
   
[38]
38
   
[16]
16
   
[39]
39
   
[17]
17
   
[40]
40
   
[18]
18
   
[41]
41
   
[19]
19
   
[42]
42
   
[20]
20
   
[43]
43
   
[21]
21
   
[44]
44
   
[22]
22
   
[45]
45
   
[23]
23
   
[46]
46
    Advanced Programming
35
[804] Wireless programming
Section Zone Default
Default
Default
Default
Section Zone Default
Default
Default
Default
[47]
47
   
[56]
56
   
[48]
48
   
[57]
57
   
[49]
49
   
[58]
58
   
[50]
50
   
[59]
59
   
[51]
51
   
[60]
60
   
[52]
52
   
[61]
61
   
[53]
53
   
[62]
62
   
[54]
54
   
[63]
63
   
[55]
55
   
[64]
64
   
Note: Chime enable for openings and closings of zones follow the settings in Section [076] Options [1] and [2] when * 4 chime enable.
[804][001]-[064] Wireless Device Serial Numbers
Zone Sub
Sec.
Serial Number
Zone Sub
Sec.
Serial Number
1
[001]
|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|
33
[033]
|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|
2
[002]
|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|
34
[034]
|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|
3
[003]
|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|
35
[035]
|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|
4
[004]
|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|
36
[036]
|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|
5
[005]
|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|
37
[037]
|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|
6
[006]
|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|
38
[038]
|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|
7
[007]
|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|
39
[039]
|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|
8
[008]
|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|
40
[040]
|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|
9
[009]
|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|
41
[041]
|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|
10
[010]
|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|
42
[042]
|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|
11
[011]
|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|
43
[043]
|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|
12
[012]
|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|
44
[044]
|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|
13
[013]
|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|
45
[045]
|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|
14
[014]
|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|
46
[046]
|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|
15
[015]
|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|
47
[047]
|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|
16
[016]
|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|
48
[048]
|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|
17
[017]
|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|
49
[049]
|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|
18
[018]
|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|
50
[050]
|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|
19
[019]
|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|
51
[051]
|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|
20
[020]
|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|
52
[052]
|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|
21
[021]
|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|
53
[053]
|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|
22
[022]
|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|
54
[054]
|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|
23
[023]
|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|
55
[055]
|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|
24
[024]
|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|
56
[056]
|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|
25
[025]
|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|
57
[057]
|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|
26
[026]
|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|
58
[058]
|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|
27
[027]
|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|
59
[059]
|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|
28
[028]
|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|
60
[060]
|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|
29
[029]
|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|
61
[061]
|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|
30
[030]
|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|
62
[062]
|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|
31
[031]
|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|
63
[063]
|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|
32
[032]
|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|
64
[064]
|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|
[804][081] Wireless Supervisory Window
Default
096
EU
008
|_______|_______|_______|
Value=Entry x 15 minutes. E.g., 6 x 15 minutes equals 1.5 hours. Valid entries are 4-96 (1 hour -24 hours) SCW9055/9057 Wireless Alarm System
36
[804][082]-[089] Zone Transmitter Supervision Options
[804][101]-[156] Wireless Key Programming
[804][181] Wireless Key 1-8 Enable/Disable
[082] Zone 1-8
[083] Zones 9-16
[084] Zones 17-24
[085] Zones 25-32
Opt
Def.
Def.
Def.
Def.
1

Zone 1

Zone 9

Zone 17

Zone 25
2

Zone 2

Zone 10

Zone 18

Zone 26
3

Zone 3

Zone 11

Zone 19

Zone 27
4

Zone 4

Zone 12

Zone 20

Zone 28
5

Zone 5

Zone 13

Zone 21

Zone 29
6

Zone 6

Zone 14

Zone 22

Zone 30
7

Zone 7

Zone 15

Zone 23

Zone 31
8

Zone 8

Zone 16

Zone 24

Zone 32
[086] Zone 33-40
[087] Zones 41-48
[088] Zones 49-56
[089] Zones 57-64
Opt
Def.
Def.
Def.
Def.
1

Zone 33

Zone 41

Zone 49

Zone 57
2

Zone 34

Zone 42

Zone 50

Zone 58
3

Zone 35

Zone 43

Zone 51

Zone 59
4

Zone 36

Zone 44

Zone 52

Zone 60
5

Zone 37

Zone 45

Zone 53

Zone 61
6

Zone 38

Zone 46

Zone 54

Zone 62
7

Zone 39

Zone 47

Zone 55

Zone 63
8

Zone 40

Zone 48

Zone 56

Zone 64
Wireless Key Programming
Enable/Disable
Sub Serial Number
Sub
#1
#2
#3
#4
#5
#6
Sub
Sect.
Sect. Def.03
Def.04
Def.27
Def.30
Def.13
Def.14
Sect. Def.
1
[101]
|___|___|___|___|___|___|___|___|
[141]
|___|___| |___|___| |___|___| |___|___| |___|___| |___|___|
[181]

2
[102]
|___|___|___|___|___|___|___|___|
[142]
|___|___| |___|___| |___|___| |___|___| |___|___| |___|___|

3
[103]
|___|___|___|___|___|___|___|___|
[143]
|___|___| |___|___| |___|___| |___|___| |___|___| |___|___|

4
[104]
|___|___|___|___|___|___|___|___|
[144]
|___|___| |___|___| |___|___| |___|___| |___|___| |___|___|

5
[105]
|___|___|___|___|___|___|___|___|
[145]
|___|___| |___|___| |___|___| |___|___| |___|___| |___|___|

6
[106]
|___|___|___|___|___|___|___|___|
[146]
|___|___| |___|___| |___|___| |___|___| |___|___| |___|___|

7
[107]
|___|___|___|___|___|___|___|___|
[147]
|___|___| |___|___| |___|___| |___|___| |___|___| |___|___|

8
[108]
|___|___|___|___|___|___|___|___|
[148]
|___|___| |___|___| |___|___| |___|___| |___|___| |___|___|

9
[109]
|___|___|___|___|___|___|___|___|
[149]
|___|___| |___|___| |___|___| |___|___| |___|___| |___|___|
[182]

10
[110]
|___|___|___|___|___|___|___|___|
[150]
|___|___| |___|___| |___|___| |___|___| |___|___| |___|___|

11
[111]
|___|___|___|___|___|___|___|___|
[151]
|___|___| |___|___| |___|___| |___|___| |___|___| |___|___|

12
[112]
|___|___|___|___|___|___|___|___|
[152]
|___|___| |___|___| |___|___| |___|___| |___|___| |___|___|

13
[113]
|___|___|___|___|___|___|___|___|
[153]
|___|___| |___|___| |___|___| |___|___| |___|___| |___|___|

14
[114]
|___|___|___|___|___|___|___|___|
[154]
|___|___| |___|___| |___|___| |___|___| |___|___| |___|___|

15
[115]
|___|___|___|___|___|___|___|___|
[155]
|___|___| |___|___| |___|___| |___|___| |___|___| |___|___|

16
[116]
|___|___|___|___|___|___|___|___|
[156]
|___|___| |___|___| |___|___| |___|___| |___|___| |___|___|

Opt Def.
ON
OFF
1

Key 1 Enabled

Key 1 Disabled
2

Key 2 Enabled

Key 2 Disabled
3

Key 3 Enabled

Key 3 Disabled
4

Key 4 Enabled

Key 4 Disabled
5

Key 5 Enabled

Key 5 Disabled
6

Key 6 Enabled

Key 6 Disabled
7

Key 7 Enabled

Key 7 Disabled
8

Key 8 Enabled

Key 8 Disabled Advanced Programming
37
[804][182] Wireless Key 9-16 Enable/Disable
[804][201]-[204] Wireless Keypad Serial Number
[804][301-[304] Wireless Siren Serial Number
[804][311] Wireless Siren #1 Options
[804][312] Wireless Siren #2 Options
Opt Def.
ON
OFF
1

Key 9 Enabled

Key 9 Disabled
2

Key 10 Enabled

Key 10 Disabled
3

Key 11 Enabled

Key 11 Disabled
4

Key 12 Enabled

Key 12 Disabled
5

Key 13 Enabled

Key 13 Disabled
6

Key 14 Enabled

Key 14 Disabled
7

Key 15 Enabled

Key 15 Disabled
8

Key 16 Enabled

Key 16 Disabled
Wireless keypad #01 Serial Number
Def.
00000000
|_____|_____|_____|_____|_____|_____|_____|_____|
Wireless keypad #02 Serial Number
Def.
00000000
|_____|_____|_____|_____|_____|_____|_____|_____|
Wireless keypad #03 Serial Number
Def.
00000000
|_____|_____|_____|_____|_____|_____|_____|_____|
Wireless keypad #04 Serial Number
Def.
00000000
|_____|_____|_____|_____|_____|_____|_____|_____|
[301] Wireless Siren #01 Serial Number
Def.
00000000
|_____|_____|_____|_____|_____|_____|_____|_____|
[302] Wireless Siren #02 Serial Number
Def.
00000000
|_____|_____|_____|_____|_____|_____|_____|_____|
[303] Wireless Siren #03 Serial Number
Def.
00000000
|_____|_____|_____|_____|_____|_____|_____|_____|
[304] Wireless Siren #04 Serial Number
Def.
00000000
|_____|_____|_____|_____|_____|_____|_____|_____|
Opt Def.
ON
OFF
1

Siren Alarm Enabled

Siren Alarm Disabled
2

Buzzer Notifications Enabled

Buzzer Notifications Disabled
3

Door Chime Enabled

Door Chime Disabled
4

Trouble Beeps Enabled

Trouble Beeps Disabled
5

Squawks Enabled

Squawks Disabled
6

Enable Strobe

Disable Strobe
7

Buzzer Alarm / Strobe Follows BTO

Buzzer Alarm / Strobe Follows Alarm Condition
8

Siren Tamper Enabled

Siren Tamper Disabled
Opt Def.
ON
OFF
1

Siren Alarm Enabled

Siren Alarm Disabled
2

Buzzer Notifications Enabled

Buzzer Notifications Disabled
3

Door Chime Enabled

Door Chime Disabled
4

Trouble Beeps Enabled

Trouble Beeps Disabled
5

Squawks Enabled

Squawks Disabled
6

Enable Strobe

Disable Strobe
7

Buzzer Alarm / Strobe Follows BTO

Buzzer Alarm / Strobe Follows Alarm Condition
8

Siren Tamper Enabled

Siren Tamper Disabled SCW9055/9057 Wireless Alarm System
38
[804][313] Wireless Siren #3 Options
[804][314] Wireless Siren #4 Options
[804][320] Global Siren Options
[804][330] Maximum Outdoor Siren Activation Timer
[804][401]-[404] Wireless Repeater Programming
[804][900] General Wireless Options
[850] Cellular Signal Strength (DSC Communicator)
Enter [*][8][Installer Code][850] to display the Cellular network signal strength on the SCW9055/57 LCD. Scroll down to view. 5 bars
indicates maximum signal strength.
[851] Alternate Communicator Programming
For information regarding programming the Alarm.com alternate communicator, refer to Chapter 7 Alarm.com Communicator. For
information regarding programming the DSC communicator, refer to the Communicator Installation manual.
Opt Def.
ON
OFF
1

Siren Alarm Enabled

Siren Alarm Disabled
2

Buzzer Notifications Enabled

Buzzer Notifications Disabled
3

Door Chime Enabled

Door Chime Disabled
4

Trouble Beeps Enabled

Trouble Beeps Disabled
5

Squawks Enabled

Squawks Disabled
6

Enable Strobe

Disable Strobe
7

Buzzer Alarm / Strobe Follows BTO

Buzzer Alarm / Strobe Follows Alarm Condition
8

Siren Tamper Enabled

Siren Tamper Disabled
Opt Def.
ON
OFF
1

Siren Alarm Enabled

Siren Alarm Disabled
2

Buzzer Notifications Enabled

Buzzer Notifications Disabled
3

Door Chime Enabled

Door Chime Disabled
4

Trouble Beeps Enabled

Trouble Beeps Disabled
5

Squawks Enabled

Squawks Disabled
6

Enable Strobe

Disable Strobe
7

Buzzer Alarm / Strobe Follows BTO

Buzzer Alarm / Strobe Follows Alarm Condition
8

Siren Tamper Enabled

Siren Tamper Disabled
Opt Def.
ON
OFF
1

Tamper Activates Siren/Strobe While Disarmed

Tamper Does Not Activate Siren/Strobe While Disarmed
2

Pre-Alarm Signal Enabled

Pre-Alarm Signal Disabled
3-8

Future Use
Default
010 |_____|_____|_____| Valid Entries are 001-255 minutes
[401] Wireless Repeater #01 Serial Number
Def.
00000000
|_____|_____|_____|_____|_____|_____|_____|_____|
[402] Wireless Repeater #02 Serial Number
Def.
00000000
|_____|_____|_____|_____|_____|_____|_____|_____|
[403] Wireless Repeater #03 Serial Number
Def.
00000000
|_____|_____|_____|_____|_____|_____|_____|_____|
[404] Wireless Repeater #04 Serial Number
Def.
00000000
|_____|_____|_____|_____|_____|_____|_____|_____|
i
For repeater supervision, ensure that dip switch 3 on the repeater is in the OFF state.
Opt
Def.
ON
OFF
1

Repeater Harsh Placement Test Enabled

Repeater Harsh Placement Test Disabled
2-6
Future Use
7

RF Jam Disabled

RF Jam Enabled
8

Future Use
 Advanced Programming
39
Special Installer Functions
(Accessible through Installer Programming)
[898] Wireless Device Enrollment (See Section 2)
[899] Template Programming (See Section 3)
[900] Panel Version
|______|______|______|______|
Not Programmable (e.g. Ver. 1.0 = 0100)
[904]-[907] Wireless Device Placement Test
Enter [*][8][Installer Code][904], [905] [906] or [907] to placement test wireless zones, keypad, sirens and repeaters respecti
vely. See
“Wireless Device Setup” on page 9.
[908] Wireless Modules
Enter [*][8][Installer Code][908] to display all wireless modules enrolled on the system. Scroll to display the name and slot n
umber of
each device. e.g., an indoor siren enrolled on slot one is displayed as 'WT49X1 1.'
[990] Installer Lockout Enable
Enter [990][Installer Code][990]
[991] Installer Lockout Disable
Enter [991][Installer Code][991]
[992] Alternate Communicator Label Broadcast
Enter [992][*]
Note:
Perform the alternate communicator label broadcast at the SCW9055/57 main unit.
[996] Restore Wireless Device Programming Factory Defaults
Enter [996][Installer Code][996]
[998] Restore Panel Default Programming
Enter [998][Installer Code][998]
[999] Restore Factory Default Programming
Enter [999][Installer Code][999] SCW9055/9057 Wireless Alarm System
40
Local Keypad Programming
Enter [Q] when in Installer Programming to access keypad programming.
[000] Keypad Function Key Programming
Function Key Options
[001]-[064] Label Programming (Zone 1-64)
[00] Null Key
[09] Future Use
[25]
Instant Stay Arm*
[01] Future Use
[10] Future Use
[26]-[32] Future Use
[02] Future Use
[11] Future Use
[33]
Night Arm
[03] Stay Arm
[12] Future Use
[04] Away Arm
[13] Command Output #1
[05] [*][9]No Entry Arm
[14] Command Output #2
* Do not use this function key on CP-01 panels
[06] [*][4] Chime On/Off [15] Future Use
[07] Future Use
[16] [*][0] Quick Exit
(See section [804] subsection [141]-[156])
[08] [*][1] Bypass
[17]
Reactivate Stay/Away
zones
***Aux Alarm key not intended for medical signals
Default Key 1 Default Key 2
Default Key 3 Default Key 4
Default Key 5

|__0__|__3__|

|__0__|__4__|

|__0__|__6__|

|__0__|__8__|
|__1__|__6__|
Zone Sub
Sect.
Default
Z O N E _ _ _ _ X X _ _ _ _
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _


Zone Sub
Sect.
XX = 01 - 64
1
[001]
|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|
|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|
13 [013]
|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|
|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|
2
[002]
|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|
|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|
14 [014]
|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|
|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|
3
[003]
|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|
|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|
15 [015]
|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|
|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|
4
[004]
|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|
|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|
16 [016]
|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|
|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|
5
[005]
|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|
|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|
17 [017]
|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|
|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|
6
[006]
|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|
|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|
18 [018]
|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|
|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|
7
[007]
|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|
|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|
19 [019]
|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|
|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|
8
[008]
|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|
|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|
20 [020]
|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|
|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|
9
[009]
|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|
|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|
21 [021]
|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|
|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|
10
[010]
|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|
|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|
22 [022]
|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|
|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|
11
[011]
|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|
|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|
23 [023]
|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|
|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|
12
[012]
|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|
|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|
24 [024]
|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|
|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____| Advanced Programming
41
Zone Sub
Sect.
Default
Z O N E _ _ _ _ X X _ _ _ _
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _


Zone Sub
Sect.
XX = 01 - 64
25
[025]
|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|
|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|
45 [045]
|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|
|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|
26
[026]
|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|
|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|
46 [046]
|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|
|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|
27
[027]
|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|
|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|
47 [047]
|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|
|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|
28
[028]
|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|
|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|
48 [048]
|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|
|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|
29
[029]
|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|
|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|
49 [049]
|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|
|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|
30
[030]
|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|
|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|
50 [050]
|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|
|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|
31
[031]
|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|
|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|
51 [051]
|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|
|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|
32
[032]
|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|
|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|
52 [052]
|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|
|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|
33
[033]
|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|
|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|
53 [053]
|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|
|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|
34
[034]
|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|
|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|
54 [054]
|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|
|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|
35
[035]
|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|
|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|
55 [055]
|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|
|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|
36
[036]
|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|
|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|
56 [056]
|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|
|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|
37
[037]
|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|
|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|
57 [057]
|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|
|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|
38
[038]
|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|
|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|
58 [058]
|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|
|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|
39
[039]
|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|
|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|
59 [059]
|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|
|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|
40
[040]
|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|
|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|
60 [060]
|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|
|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|
41
[041]
|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|
|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|
61 [061]
|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|
|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|
42
[042]
|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|
|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|
62 [062]
|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|
|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|
43
[043]
|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|
|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|
63 [063]
|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|
|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|
44
[044]
|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|
|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|
64 [064]
|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|
|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____| SCW9055/9057 Wireless Alarm System
42
[065] Fire Alarm Label (2 x 14 characters)
[066] Fail to Arm Event Message (2 x 16 characters)
[067] Alarm When Armed Event Message (2 x 16 characters)
[074] First Keypad Options
[075] Second Keypad Options
[076] Third Keypad Options
[077] Programmed LCD Message

(2 x 16 Characters)
Default
F I R E _ Z O N E _ _ _ _ _
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _


|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|
|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|
Default
S Y S T E M _ H A S _ _ _ _ _ _
F A I L E D _ T O _ A R M _ _ _


|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|
|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|
Default
A L A R M _ O C C U R R E D _ _
W H I L E _ A R M E D _ _ _


|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|
|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|
Opt
Def.
ON
OFF
1


[F] Key Enabled

[F] Key Disabled
2


[A] Key Enabled

[A] Key Disabled
3


[P] Key Enabled

[P] Key Disabled
4


Quick Arm Prompt ON

Quick Arm Prompt OFF
5

Quick Exit Prompt ON


Quick Exit Prompt OFF
6


Bypass Options Prompt ON

Bypass Options Prompt OFF
7


User Initiated Call-up Prompt ON

User Initiated Call-up Prompt OFF
8


Hold [P]anic Key Prompt ON

Hold [P]anic Key Prompt OFF
Opt
Def.
ON
OFF
1


Local Clock Display Enabled

Local Clock Display Disabled
2

Local Clock Displays 24 Hr. Time


Local Clock Displays AM/PM
3


Auto Alarm Scroll Enabled

Auto Alarm Scroll Disabled
4


Language Selection Accessible From Any Menu

Language Selection Accessible From Installer Only
5

Power LED Enabled


Power LED Disabled
6


Power LED Indicates AC Present

Power LED Indicates AC Absent
7


Alarms are Displayed While Armed

Alarms Are NOT Displayed While Armed
8

Auto Scroll Open Zones Enabled


Auto Scroll Open Zones Disabled
Opt
Def.
ON
OFF
1-4

Future Use
5


Late To Open Prompts Enabled

Late To Open Prompts Disabled
6-8

Future Use
|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|
|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____| Advanced Programming
43
[078] Programmed LCD Message Duration
[100] CO Detector Alarm Label (2 x 14 Characters)
[101] System Label (2 x 14 Characters)
[120] Command Output 1 Label (2 x 14 Characters)
[121] Command Output 2 Label (2 x 14 Characters)
[996] Label Default
Enter [996][*]
[997] Keypad Version
Enter [997] Read only (e.g., 1234 = version 12.34)
[998] Initiate Global Label Broadcast
Enter [998][*]
Note
: Label broadcast must be initiated by Keypad 1.
Note:
Label broadcast must be initiated by the SCW9055/57 main
unit.
[999] Reset All Keypad Programming To Factory Defaults
Enter [999][*]
|____|____|____| Default 003 (Valid entries are 000-255, 000=unlimited message display)
Default
CO
_
ALARM
_ _ _ _ _ _
EVACUATE
_
A R EA
_


|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|
|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|
Default
SYSTEM

_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _


|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|
|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|
Default
COMMAND
_
O/P
_
1
_
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _


|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|
|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|
Default
COMMAND
_
O/P
_
2
_
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _


|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|
|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____|____| SCW9055/9057 Wireless Alarm System
44
Programming Descriptions
The following is a description of the programming features and options available in the control panel.
[001]-[004] Zone Definitions
i
Fire zones and 24-Hour zones go into alarm whether the system is armed or disarmed and do not follow the exit delay.
00 Null Zone:
This zone type is intended for zones that are NOT used.
01 Delay 1:
This zone type follows the Entry Delay 1 and Exit Delay timers programmed in section [005] and is normally used
for entry/exit doors. The exit delay starts as soon as the panel is armed. The zone may be opened and closed during the delay
time without causing an alarm. After the exit delay time has expired, opening the zone starts the entry delay timer. During the

entry delay time, the keypad buzzer sounds steadily to advise the user that the system should be disarmed. If the panel is dis-
armed before the entry delay expires, no alarm is generated.
02 Delay 2:
This zone type operates the same as the Delay 1 [01] zone except it follows the Entry Delay 2 time which is set in
section [005].
03 Instant:
This zone type is normally used for door/window contacts, but is instant when opened after the exit delay expires.
04 Interior:
This zone type is used with interior motion detectors. Interior zones have an exit delay and an entry delay if a delay
type zone has been violated first. The zone goes into alarm when the entry delay of the delay type zone has expired, if the sys
-
tem has not been disarmed. If the protected area is entered without entering the delayed entrance and an interior zone is vio-
lated, an immediate alarm is generated.
05 Interior Stay/Away:
If the system is Stay armed, this zone type is bypassed. If the system is Away armed, the zone acts like an
interior type zone [04].
06 Delay Stay/Away:
If the system is Stay armed, this zone type is bypassed. If the system is Away armed, this zone will always
follow the entry delay time for Entry Delay 1 when violated.
i
The automatic bypass on Stay/Away type zones is NOT removed by any event other than a valid exit through a delay type 1
zone during the exit delay, arming using the Away function key or by pressing [

][1] while armed.
07-08
Future Use
09 24 Hour Supervisory (Hardwired):
The zone is similar to a fire zone. Supervision options (NC, EOL, and DEOL) do not
affect the functionality of the zone. The Restored state of this zone type is 5.6 K zone end-of-line, the Alarm state is Short
and
the trouble state is Open.
i
This zone type must not be used for wireless zones.
10 24 Hour Supervisory Buzzer:
When triggered, the system buzzer sounds steadily at medium volume until a valid access code
is entered.
11 24 Hour Burglary:
This zone type is active at all times. It reports an alarm if the panel is armed or disarmed. This zone type
sounds the bell for the length of Bell cut-off (section [005]) if the audible attribute is enabled.
12
Future Use
13 24 Hour Gas:
Similar to 24 Hour Burglary except for System Event output type and SIA identifier.
14 24 Hour Heat:
Similar to 24 Hour Burglary except for System Event output type and SIA identifier.
15 24 Hour Medical:
Similar to 24 Hour Burglary except for System Event output type and SIA identifier.
16 24 Hour Panic:
Similar to 24 Hour Burglary except for System Event output type and SIA identifier.
17 24 Hour Emergency:
Similar to 24 Hour Burglary except for System Event output type and SIA identifier.
18
Future Use
19 24 Hour Water:
Similar to 24 Hour Burglary except for System Event output type and SIA identifier.
20 24 Hour Freeze:
Similar to 24 Hour Burglary except for System Event output type and SIA identifier.
21
Future Use
22 Momentary Keyswitch Arm:
A keyswitch device may be connected to the zone programmed as momentary keyswitch arm.
Momentary activation of the zone alternately arms/disarms the system and silences alarms. Tampers and faults only initiate
their respective trouble sequence. The keypad does not display an indication when this type of zone is activated.
i
With audible alarm active, using the keyswitch when disarmed is the same as entering an access code at the keypad. Using the
keyswitch during the first 30 seconds of a delayed fire alarm is the same as pressing a key at the keypad (the 90 second delay
starts). Violation of a keyswitch zone arms or disarms the system. Violation of this zone type is NOT logged nor is the Police
code transmitted. A bypass on this zone type will not be un-bypassed when the system is disarmed. When the zone is
bypassed, a zone bypass event buffer log and communication occurs immediately, NOT when the system is armed. Programming Descriptions
45
23 Maintained Keyswitch Arm (Hardwired):
Keyswitch devices can be connected to zones programmed as Maintained Key-
switch arm. In the restored state, the panel is disarmed. Violation of the zone arms the panel. Tampers and faults begin their
associated trouble sequence. If the system is armed with this keyswitch and then disarmed by another method, the keyswitch
zone must be restored and then violated before the system can be armed with this zone again. The same is true for disarming.
If the zone is restored and the system armed, the keyswitch zone must be violated and then restored to disarm the system.
i
This zone type must NOT be used for wireless zones. Activation of a keyswitch zone is intended to arm or disarm the system.
Activation of the zone will not log or transmit the Police code. A bypass on this zone type will not be un-bypassed when the
system is disarmed. When the zone is bypassed, a zone bypass event buffer log and communication occurs immediately, NOT
when the system is armed.
With an audible alarm active, using the keyswitch when disarmed is the same as entering an access code at the keypad. Acti-
vating this zone type during the first 30 seconds of a delayed fire alarm is the same as pressing a key at the keypad (the 90 s
ec-
ond delay starts). If left in the violated state, the system does not arm until the zone is restored and violated again.
24
Future Use
25 Interior Delay Zone:
This zone type is normally used with motion detectors and has a standard exit delay time.
If the panel is Away armed, the Interior Delay Zone is active at the end of the exit delay. The zone then acts like an interior
type zone [04]. If the panel is Stay armed, a violation of this zone type initiates Entry Delay 1. Violating this zone during exit
delay does not cause the system to arm in Away mode, as in regular delay type zones.
26 24 Hour Non-Alarm (or local alarm) Zone:
Zones programmed as this type are active at all times but do not cause an alarm
and are not saved in alarm memory. Zone attributes such as Zone Bypassing and Door Chime affect the functionality of this
zone.
i
This zone type sounds the bell, but does not communicate during a walk test. Tampers and faults on zones programmed as 24-
Hour non-alarm type do not cause alarms.
27-30
Future Use
31 Day Zone:
Violating this zone when disarmed sounds the keypad buzzer but does not log or report the events. Violating this
zone when armed sounds the bell and communicates the event.
32 Instant, Stay-Away Zone:
This zone is bypassed when the system is Stay armed, but it functions similarly to an Instant Zone
[03] when Away armed. This zone type is useful for motion detectors that must NOT follow the entry delay after a delay zone
is violated, but must still retain the Stay/Away functionality.
33-35
Future Use
36 24-Hour Non-Latching Tamper Zone:
This zone generates a tamper condition when violated. This zone is active when
armed or disarmed.
37 Night Zone:
This zone acts like an interior Stay/Away zone [05] when the panel is armed in any method except the following.
When the system is armed in Stay mode and the interior zones are reactivated by the user entering [

][1], this zone type will
not be activated.
81 24-Hour Carbon Monoxide (CO) Detecti
on: This zone type is used with a wireless CO detector. This zone definition has a
distinct bell cadence in the event of an alarm. The cadence of this alarm is 4 cycles of 100ms on/off pulses, followed by a 5-
second pause, and then repeated. After 4 minutes the 5-second pause is extended to 60 seconds in duration. The bell is silenced

when an access code is entered or the bell times out.
87 Delayed 24-Hour Fire (Wireless):
This zone is used with wireless smoke detectors. This zone functions similar to the stan-
dard 24 hour fire zone, except the alarm memory and transmission by the communicator is delayed 30 seconds. If the alarm is
acknowledged by pressing any key within 30 seconds, the bells will silence and the transmission will be aborted. If the smoke
detector is not restored after the alarm has been acknowledged the bell output will activate after 90 seconds. The user then ha
s
another 30-second delay before the bell output latches and communications are activated. A code is then required to silence the

bell output. A tamper or fault of this zone type will cause a fire trouble to log and transmit.
i
The fire delay is terminated if a second fire zone is tripped or if the
key is pressed during a delay.
88 Standard 24-Hour Fire (Wireless):
This zone is used with wireless smoke detectors. The bell output will sound instantly to
indicate that the smoke detector has been activated when violated. If enabled, the communicator will immediately transmit the
alarm to the monitoring station. A tamper or fault of this zone type will cause a fire trouble to log and transmit.
i
Zone attributes should NOT be changed from the default settings for all fire type zones. SCW9055/9057 Wireless Alarm System
46
[005] System Timers
After entering Section [005], program the Entry Delay 1, Entry Delay 2 and Exit Delay for the system. Entries are in seconds. P
rogram
the Bell Cut-Off Time. Valid entries are in minutes. A value of 000 in the entry or exit delay sections causes a 255 second del
ay. A
value of 000 in the BTO section produces a 1 minute bell cut-off time. However, these times are displayed as 000.
[006] Installer Code
The default Installer code is [5555] or [555555] if 6-Digit Access Codes is enabled.
[007] Master Code
The master code is a system user code that can program additional access codes, [*][5], and has access to additional user functions,
[*][6]. The default master code is [1234] or [123456] if 6-digit access codes are programmed. See section [701] Opt.[5].
[008] Maintenance Code
The Maintenance Code is a system user code that can only arm and disarm. Any other system function that requires an access code is
not accessible by this code. The default Maintenance code is [AAAA] or [AAAA00] if 6-digit access codes are programmed. See sec-
tion [701] Opt. 5.
[009] I/O Programming (PGM)
Enter the 2-digit PGM option while the I/O type is selected as PGM in section [013] option [1] & [2].
PGM Output Options:
89 Auto Verified Fire Zone (Wireless) (Required for CP-01):
This zone type is to be used with wireless smoke detectors. This
zone definition ensures an alarm condition persists by looking for a second alarm transmission or the absence of an alarm
restoral condition. The system ignores subsequent alarm transmissions after the first transmission from the same zone for a
duration of 40 seconds. If the sensor is in an alarm condition at the end of this 40-second delay, the system will go into full
alarm, sounding the bell, logging and communicating the event. If the zone is in a restored condition at the end of the 40-sec-
ond delay, the system will start another 80 second verification time sequence. If a fire zone goes into alarm during this perio
d,
the system will go into full alarm, sounding the bell, logging and communicating the event.
i
A tamper or fault of this zone type will cause a fire trouble to log and transmit.
The wireless smoke detector that is used with this zone type must have a built-in siren to act as a pre-alert to the system alarm.
Multiple Fire Detections:
If another device detects fire during the auto verify or delay sequence, the sequence is immediately
terminated and alarms are generated for all pending zones. This applies to all other fire zones or system
key alarms on the
system (i.e., two fire alarms from different devices on the system will cancel all pending fire delays and create immediate
alarms).
00
Null PGM (Not Used)
01
Burglary and Fire Bell Follower:
The PGM switches to ground when any bell activity occurs. This PGM type follows:

Fire pre-alerts

CO (Carbon Monoxide) alarm signal

Temporal three fire signal (if enabled)

All burglary and fire alarms

Bell cut-off time
This output does NOT follow bell squawks. The main bell still activates for all alarms.
i
Note:
The fire bell has precedence over burglary. If a fire alarm occurs when a burglary alarm is active, the fire and burglary
output pulses (“Fire” PGM) with the main bell. This PGM type follows the bell (pulsed if fire, steady if burglary).
02-04 Future Use
05
SystemArmed Status:
The PGM switches to ground at the beginning of the exit delay when the system is armed. The output
goes high (open) when the system is disarmed.
06
Ready to Arm:
The PGM switches to ground when the system is ready to arm (all non-force arm zones on the system are
restored). When an access code is entered to arm the system and the exit delay begins, the PGM output is de-activated. This
PGM operates as described during walk test mode (if all zones are restored).
07
Keypad Buzzer Follow:
PGM output switches to ground when the keypad buzzer is activated by the events described below:

24-hour supervisory buzzer zone alarm
• No activity arm pre-alert

Entry delay
• Audible exit fault

Audible exit delay
• Door chime
The PGM output remains switched to ground while the keypad buzzer is active. This PGM type does not activate for local key
presses or trouble beeps.
08
Courtesy Pulse:
This PGM output switches to ground for 2 minutes past the end of entry or exit times to allow enough time
for complete entry to or exit from the premises. If the system is armed through the
No Activity Arming
method this output will
NOT activate. Programming Descriptions
47
[012] Keypad Lockout Options
This section determines how the keypad function operates.
09
System Trouble:
This PGM output switches to ground when any of the selected Troubles are detected. The output de-acti-
vates when all of the selected Troubles are restored. The PGM attributes from this output are as follows:
1 Service Required 5 Device (Fire) Fault
2 A.C. Failure 6 Device Tamper
3 Telephone Line Fault 7 Device Low Battery
4 Communications (Failure to Communicate) 8 Loss of Clock
10
Latched System Event (Strobe):
This PGM output switches to ground when any of the selected system events (alarms) occur
on the system. The PGM output deactivates when an access code is entered to disarm the system. If an alarm activates this outpu
t
in the disarmed state, the alarm deactivates when a code is entered during bell time-out or if the system arms after bell time-out.
Note:
This output activates for all silent and audible alarms.
i
Note:
This PGM output activates for alarm conditions only. Pre-alerts or delays do NOT activate the output. When this output
follows the output timer, events that have been disabled from activating the output do not restart the timer.
11
System Tamper:
This PGM output switches to ground when any Tamper condition occurs on the system. If set for steady
operation, this output de-activates when all Tamper conditions on the system are restored. If this output is set for a pulsed o
ut-
put, the PGM output switches to ground when a Tamper condition occurs and remains on for the duration of the PGM output
timer (programmed in section [170]). This activates for each Tamper condition, even if an un-restored Tamper condition is
present on the system.
Tampers include zone tamper (DEOL), alarm panel case tamper, TLM trouble, RF Jam, and all zone and device tampers.
12
TLM and Alarm:
The output activates when a Telephone Line Trouble (TLM) condition is present and then an alarm occurs
on the system.
13-16 Future Use
17
AwayArmed Status:
This PGM output follows the status of the Stay/Away zones. If the system is armed with the Stay/Away
zones always active, then the Away output is active.
18
Stay Armed Status:
This PGM output follows the status of the Stay/Away zones. If the system is armed with the Stay/Away
zones bypassed, then the Stay output is active. Arming in Night mode activates this PGM output.
19
Command Output #1:
Entering the [

][7][1] command activates the PGM type according to how the PGM attributes are
configured. Refer to sections [501] and [502] for attribute information.
20
Command Output #2:
Entering the [

][7][2] command activates the PGM type according to how the PGM attributes are
configured. Refer to sections [501] and [502] for attribute information.
21-39 Future Use
Number of Invalid Codes Before Lockout
Program a number from 000 to 255 to determine the number of invalid master, user or installer access code entries to reach
keypad lockout. When keypad lockout occurs, the system is rendered inoperative via the keypad for the programmed duration
only (wireless keys and keyswitch zones still function). When any keys are pressed, an error tone sounds. Entering 000 dis-
ables keypad lockout.
Lockout Duration
Program a time from 000 to 255 minutes to determine the length of time before lockout resets and the keypad can once again
be used.

If lockout is not reached within the hour roll-over, the number of invalid attempts is reset to 0.

After a valid access code is entered, the number of invalid attempts is reset to 0.

Fire, Auxiliary and Panic keys are still active during keypad lockout.

Key presses do not reset the timer.

If the lockout timer was active before powering down, the system lockout is active for the programmed duration on
power up.
1 Burglary
2 Fire
3 Panic
4 Medical
5 Supervisory
6 Priority
7 Duress
8 Latched
Delay, Interior Delay, Instant, Interior, Stay/Away, Instant Stay/Away, Night, Day Zone and 24-Hour Burg. zones
Key, Fire zone
Key and Panic
Key, Medical and Emergency zones
Supervisory, 24-Hour Buzzer, Auxiliary, Freeze, and Water zones
Gas, Heat, 24-Hour CO zones, 24-Hour Non-latching Tamper
Duress alarms
Follows output timer SCW9055/9057 Wireless Alarm System
48
[013] First System Options
[014] Second System Options
Option Description
[1]
ON:
Hardwired Zone 33 Enabled. Hardwired Zone 33 Input is enabled. The I/O-1 terminal functions as an input for Zone 33.
The zone definition is programmed in the first entry of section [003]. Zone supervision is determined by attributes 14, 15, and

16 programmed in section [133].
OFF:
PGM1 Output Enabled. The I/O-1 terminal functions as an output. the PGM type is programmed in the first entry of
section [009]. PGM attributes are programmed in section [501].
[2]
ON:
Hardwired Zone 34 Enabled. Hardwired Zone 34 Input is enabled. The I/O-2 terminal functions as an input for Zone 34.
The zone definition is programmed in the first entry of section [003]. Zone supervision is determined by attributes 14, 15, and

16 programmed in section [134].
OFF:
PGM2 Output Enabled. I/O-2 terminal functions as an output. the PGM type is programmed in the first entry of section
[009]. PGM attributes are programmed in section [502].
[3]-[5] Future Use
[6]
ON:
Audible Exit Fault Enabled. If a delay zone is not secured correctly and not force-armed, at the end of the exit delay, the
system goes into entry delay and turns ON the bell output.
OFF:
Audible Exit Fault Disabled. The entry delay sounds through the keypad but not the bell.
[7]
Future Use
[8]
ON:
Temporal Three Fire Signal Enabled. Temporal Three Fire Signal is used to annunciate fire alarms (½ second ON, ½ sec-
ond OFF, ½ second ON, ½ second OFF, ½ second ON, 1 ½ seconds OFF).
OFF:
Standard Pulsed Fire Signal. The system pulses the bell output (1 second ON, 1 second OFF).
Option
Description
[1]
ON:
Arm/Disarm Bell Squawk Enabled. The system squawks the bell output once when armed, twice when disarmed and 3
times when disarmed with alarms in memory.
OFF:
Arm/Disarm Bell Squawk Disabled. The bell output does not activate.
[2]
Future Use
[3]
ON:
RF Jam Logs after 5 Minutes. The system logs an RF Jam trouble condition if the condition is present for 5 minutes.
OFF:
RF Jam Logs after 20 Seconds. The system logs the trouble condition after 20 seconds.
i
The trouble is displayed on the keypad as soon as it occurs. The panel Trouble LED changes from yellow to orange indicating
the presence of an RF jam.
[4]
ON:
Aux Boost Enabled: When the system is in Power Save mode, (AC Trouble) Aux+ output voltage is regulated 12VDC.
OFF:
Aux Boost Disabled: Aux+ output voltage is not regulated.
[5]
Future Use
[6]
ON:
Audible Exit with Urgency. The keypad beeps once every second, and 3 times a second during the last 10 seconds,
during exit delay when the system is armed with a user code or armed in the Away mode. This option always on for CP-01.
OFF:
Silent Exit Delay. The keypad does not beep during exit delay.
[7]
Future Use
[8]
ON:
Fire Bell is Continuous. The bell output does not time out if a fire alarm occurs. The User must turn off the bell by enter-
ing a valid user code.
OFF:
Fire Bell follows Bell Cut-off. The bell output times out normally.
i
Only zone definitions [87], [88], and [89] (along with the [F] Key) use this signaling. Programming Descriptions
49
[015] Third System Options
[016] Fourth System Options
Option Description
[1]
ON:
Fire Key Enabled. Pressing and holding the fire
key for 2 seconds generates a fire alarm. The keypad sounds a set
of 3 beeps to acknowledge the valid alarm and the buzzer sounds a pulsing alarm tone for the length of the bell time-out, or
until an access code is entered. An alarm reporting code (if programmed) is transmitted.
OFF:
Fire Key Disabled. The Fire
key does not sound or report an alarm when pressed.
i
When enabled, this key generates alarms at all times.
[2]
ON:
Panic Key Audible. When a valid Panic key
alarm is generated, the keypad buzzer sounds a series of 3 beeps to
acknowledge the alarm. The buzzer then sounds a steady tone for the length of the bell time-out or until an access code is
entered.
OFF:
Panic Key Silent. When a valid Panic key
alarm is generated, the keypad buzzer and the bell output remain silent,
but the alarm is still transmitted (if programmed).
[3]
ON:
Quick Exit Enabled. See [

][0] in section 3.3 [

] Commands.
OFF:
Quick Exit Disabled.
[4]
ON:
Quick Arming Enabled/Function Keys Do Not Require Code. [

][0] arming and Stay/Away function keys may be used
to arm the system without the entry of a valid access code. Wireless keys not associated to a user code may also be used.
OFF:
Quick Arming Disabled/Function Keys Require Code. [

][0] arming is not permitted, and Stay/Away function keys
require the entry of an access code to arm the system.
i
This option must be OFF to identify wireless keys for arming.
[5]
ON:
Code Required for Bypassing. After entering the [

][1] Bypass Zones command, an access code must be entered before
zones may be bypassed.
OFF:
No Code Required. No code is required to enter the [

][1] Bypass Zones command to bypass zones.
[6]
ON:
Master Code Not Changeable. The Master Code (access code 40) may not be changed by the user with [

][5] access
code programming. The Master Code can only be programmed in Installer Programming, section [007].
OFF:
Master Code Changeable. The Master Code (access code 40) may be programmed by the user using the [

][5][Master
Code][40] command. The Master Code may also be programmed in Installer Programming.
[7]
ON:
TLM Enabled. The Telephone Line Monitor function is active and the system indicates if a Telephone Line Trouble
condition exists when using the
[

][
2
]
View Trouble Conditions command.
OFF:
TLM disabled. The Telephone Line Monitor function is shut off and telephone line troubles are NOT indicated by the
system.
[8]
ON:
System Tamper Enabled. The panel monitors the physical tamper switch. The switch activates if the system is taken off
the wall, or the front cover is removed, generating a System Tamper Alarm. A system tamper causes an audible alarm if the
system is armed. If the system is disarmed when a system tamper occurs, the system cannot be armed until the tamper condi-
tion is cleared.
OFF:
System Tamper Disabled. The panel does not monitor the physical tamper switch.
Option Description
[1]
ON:
Cross Zoning Enabled. The panel uses the Cross Zone attribute for burglary verification.
OFF:
Police Code Enabled. The panel uses the Police Code feature for burglary verification.
[2]
ON:
Exit Delay Restart Enabled. (Only available on CP-01 panels) If a delay zone (Delay 1 or 2 only) is violated during
the exit delay and then restored, it is considered an exit. If a delay zone is violated again it is considered a re-entry. With
this option enabled the panel restarts the exit delay. Further violations and restores of delay zones do not restart the exit
delay.
OFF:
Exit Delay Restart Disabled. Delay zone violations and restores do not restart the exit delay.
i
The exit delay can only be restarted once. This includes restarts from Away function keys. If the exit delay is silent, the addi-
tional exit time remains silent and doubles the programmed exit time (required for CP-01).
[3]
ON:
Blank Keypad When Not Used. If no keys are pressed for 30 seconds, the display and all keypad lights except back-
lighting (if enabled) turn OFF until the next keypress, entry delay, audible alarm, or keypad buzzer condition.
OFF:
Keypad Always Active. The keypad lights remain ON at all times.
[4]
ON:
Code required to remove Keypad Blanking. A valid access code must be entered before a blanked keypad can be used.
If the bell or entry delay is active, entering an access code un-blanks the keypad and disarms the system.
OFF:
No Code Not Required. Pressing any key on a blanked keypad removes the blanking. If the key is a number, then it
is considered the first digit of an access code. SCW9055/9057 Wireless Alarm System
50
[018] Sixth System Options
[023] Tenth System Options
[5]
ON:
Keypad Backlighting Enabled. Keypad backlighting is continuously on.
OFF:
Keypad Backlighting Disabled. Keypad backlighting is never on.
[6]
Future Use
[7]
ON:
Bypass Status Displayed While Armed. “
Warning Bypass Active
” displays if zones are manually bypassed when the
system is Away armed.
OFF:
Bypass Status Not Displayed While Armed. Zones that have been manually bypassed are not indicated when the sys-
tem is Away armed.
[8]
ON:
Daylight Saving Time Enabled. The panel switches between daylight-saving and standard time according to the pro-
grammed time of the year and number of hours in sections [168] and [169].
OFF:
Daylight Saving Time Disabled. The panel will NOT make time adjustments for daylight-saving time.
Option
Description
[1]
Future use
[2]
ON:
Keypad Tampers Enabled. All system keypads generate tamper troubles and restores.
OFF:
Keypad Tampers disabled. System keypads do NOT generate tamper troubles and restores.
[3]-[4]
Future use
[5]
ON:
Keypad Buzzer Follows Siren Enabled. The keypad buzzers follow the bell status.
OFF:
Keypad Buzzer Follows Siren Disabled. The keypad buzzers do NOT follow all bell activity. Only designated alarms
will activate the keypad buzzer.
[6]-[8]
Future use
Option Description
[1]
ON:
Chime on Openings Enabled. When a zone with the door chime attribute ON is violated, the system keypads and sirens
(if enabled) sound door chime beeps.
OFF:
Chime on Openings Disabled. When a zone with the door chime attribute ON is violated, the system keypads and sirens
(if enabled) do not sound door chime beeps.
[2]
ON:
Chime on Closings Enabled. When a zone with the door chime attribute ON is restored, the system keypads and sirens
(if enabled) sound door chime beeps.
OFF:
Chime on Closings Disabled. When a zone with the door chime attribute ON is restored, the system keypads and sirens
(if enabled) do not sound door chime beeps.
[3]
ON:
Test Transmission While Armed Only. The Test Transmission reporting code is only transmitted if the system is armed
at the time it is programmed to report the event.
OFF:
Test Transmission while Armed/Disarmed. The system always reports the Test Transmission reporting code at the pro-
grammed time.
[4]
ON:
Transmission Counter in Hours. The system changes the Test Transmission Reporting Cycle Time from Days to Hours.
OFF:
Transmission Counter in Days. The Test Transmission Reporting Cycle Time is in Days.
[5]
ON:
Switching From Away to Stay Disabled. The user can NOT switch from Away Arm mode to Stay Arm mode using the
function keys.
OFF:
Away to Stay Toggle Option Permitted. The user can switch arming modes.
[6]
ON:
New Alarms will not Disconnect 2-way Audio. The system does not disconnect a listen in/two-way session if an alarm
occurs.
OFF:
New Alarms Disconnect 2-way Audio. The system disconnects a listen in/two-way session. New events are transmitted
after the session ends.
i
This option must be OFF for UL listed installations. Applies to SCW9057 only.
[7]
ON:
Trouble Beeps are Silent. The system does NOT activate the keypad buzzer for any trouble condition except fire.
OFF:
Trouble Beeps Sound Every 10 Seconds. The system annunciates troubles via the keypad buzzer (2 beeps every 10 sec-
onds).
[8]
ON:
Keyswitch Arms in Away Only. Keyswitch zones on the system always arm in Away mode.
OFF:
Keyswitch Arms in Stay or Away. When a keyswitch zone is used to arm the system, the final armed mode depends on
whether the user trips a delay zone during exit delay. If the user trips a delay zone, the system arms in Away mode; If not, th
e
system arms in Stay mode. This is similar to arming the system at the keypad with an access code. The exit delay is audible. Programming Descriptions
51
[024] Eleventh System Options Code
[030] Zone Loop Response Options
This section is used to determine the Loop Response Time for hardwired zones 33 and 34.
[101]-[164] Zone Attributes
The following options can be enabled or disabled for each zone. Pressing [9] in one of these sections brings the installer to the upper
bank (attributes 9 to 16). From the upper bank, press [9] to return to the lower bank (attributes 1 to 8).
Option Description
[1]
ON:
Temperature Display Enabled. The keypad displays the temperature received from the lowest numbered external siren.
If the local clock display is also enabled, then the keypad displays date, time, and temperature.
OFF:
Temperature Display Disabled. The keypad does NOT display the temperature.
[2]
ON:
Temperature displayed in Celsius. The keypad displays the temperature in Celsius.
OFF:
Temperature displayed In Fahrenheit. The keypad displays the temperature in degrees Fahrenheit.
[3]
ON:
Internal Siren Enabled. The internal siren on the panel is enabled.
OFF:
Internal Siren Disabled. The internal siren on the panel is disabled.
[4]
ON:
Inactivity Monitored by all Zones. If no violations occur on any burglary zones during the Inactivity Timer windows
(section [591]-[592]), the panel communicates the Fail to Report In code, if programmed.
i
This code is not transmitted for panels that are Away armed. Troubles and bypassed zones will not cause activity indications.
OFF:
Inactivity Monitored only by 24-hour Non-alarm Zones. If no violations occur on a 24-hour non-alarm zone during the
Inactivity Timer windows (section [591]-[592]), the panel communicates the Fail to Report In code, if programmed.
[5]
ON:
Enable Realtime Clock: The panel sends a request to the alternate communicator module for real time/date synchroniza-
tion at midnight or when the panel clock time is lost. The updated time/date is displayed on the panel LCD.
OFF:
Disable Realtime Clock: The panel uses the local time setting as system time.

i
This option must also be enabled in the alternate communicator. Please refer to the alternate communicator installation man-
ual for more information.
[6]-[8]
Future Use
Option Description
[1]
ON:
Zone 33 is Fast Loop Response: Zone 33 has a fast loop response (36 ms).
OFF:
Zone 33 is Normal Loop Response: Zone 33 has a normal loop response (400 ms).
[2]
ON:
Zone 34 is Fast Loop Response: Zone 34 has fast loop response (36 ms).
OFF:
Zone 34 is Normal Loop Response: Zone 34 has normal loop response (400 ms).
[3]-[8]
Future Use
i
These attributes override default settings. Do NOT change fire zone attributes from their default settings.
Option
Description
[1]
Audible siren
ON:
An alarm activates the Siren.
OFF:
Silent alarm.
[2]
Steady or Pulsed-
Bell Type
ON:
The bell output is steady when the zone is in alarm.
OFF:
The bell output pulses when the zone is in alarm.
[3]
Chime
ON:
The keypad chimes when the zone is violated and when the zone is secured.
OFF:
The zone does not chime the keypad.
[4]
Bypass
ON:
The zone may be manually bypassed.
OFF:
The zone can not be bypassed.
[5]
Force Arming
ON:
The system can be armed with the zone violated. The zone is temporarily bypassed and, when
secured, is monitored by the system.
OFF:
The system cannot be armed if the zone is open.
[6]
Swinger
Shutdown
ON:
When the zone goes into alarm for the number of times programmed in the Swinger Shutdown
Counter (see section [377]), it shuts down with no further transmissions sent to the monitoring station.
The bell follows Swinger Shutdown if programmed.
OFF:
Swinger Shutdown is disabled. All alarms are transmitted and do not follow the Swinger Shutdown
Counter.
i
If a zone is in Swinger Shutdown, and this attribute is disabled, then re-enabled, the zone will no longer be in Swinger Shut-
down.
[7]
Transmission
Delay
ON:
Reporting of zone alarms are delayed for the programmed time in section [377] after the zone goes
into alarm. If a valid access code is entered within this time, no alarm signal is communicated.
OFF:
When an alarm occurs, the reporting code is transmitted immediately.
[8]
Cross Zone
ON:
The zone is enabled for cross zoning.
OFF:
The zone is not enabled for cross zoning. SCW9055/9057 Wireless Alarm System
52
[167] Alt. Comm. Communications Wait for ACK
[168] Daylight Saving Time Begin
These sections are used to program the date, time and increment that the clock moves ahead for Daylight Saving Time each year. The
following attributes can be programmed:
[169] Daylight Saving Time End
These sections are used to program the date, time and increment that the clock moves back for Standard Time each year. The foll
owing
attributes can be programmed:
[170] PGM Output Timer
Program the time, in seconds, PGM outputs programmed to follow the PGM Output Timer will activate for. Valid entries are [001] to
[255].
[9]
2-way Audio
ON:
The zone will initiate a 2-Way Audio Verification session with the Central Station.
OFF:
This zone will not initiate a 2-Way Audio session (applies to hardwired zones 33 & 34 only).
[10]
Talk-Listen/Lis-
ten-in Only
ON:
The zone initiates a 2-way session with the central station. Both microphone and speaker are acti-
vated. This option is only available when zone attribute [9] is enabled.
OFF:
The zone initiates a Listen-in only session with the central station. Only the microphone is acti-
vated. This option is only available when zone attribute [9] is enabled.
[11]-[13]
Future Use
Options [14] to [16] are used for zones 33 and 34 exclusively. If more than 1 option is enabled for options 14, 15, and 16 the lowest
attribute number will take precedence. If Options 14 and 15 are both enabled the zone follows the NC loop configuration.
[14]
Normally Closed
Loops
ON:
The zone follows the Normally Closed (NC) loop configuration.
OFF:
The zone does NOT follow NC loop configuration.
[15]
Single End of
Line (SEOL)
Resistors
ON:
The zone follows the SEOL zone configuration.
OFF:
The zone does NOT follow SEOL zone configuration.
[16]
Double End of
Line (DEOL)
Resistors
ON:
The zone follows the DEOL zone configuration.
OFF:
The zone does NOT follow DEOL zone configuration.
i
When Zone Types (section [001] to [002]) are programmed, the system changes the zone attributes to those found in the chart
included in the Programming Worksheets. The Zone Attributes will default if a new Zone Type is programmed for a specific
zone.
Ready light On:Program attributes [1-8]
Ready light and Armed light On:Program attribute [9-16] (press [1] for option 9, press [6] for option 14 etc.)
Press [9] to switch between attributes [1-8] and attributes [9-16].
This value represents the time the communicator waits for an acknowledgment (ACK) from the receiver after sending the SIA or CI
D
packet to the central station. If this timer expires before acknowledgment is received, the SCW re-transmits the Packet and inc
rements
the number of failed dialing attempts.
Month
[001] to [012] represents January to December.
Week
[000] indicates that the day of the month is programmed in the Day section below. [001] to [005] represents weeks
1 to 5 of the month. Week 5 always represents the last week in the month, regardless of whether the number of
weeks in the month is 4 or 5.
Day
[001] to [031] represents the day of the month if [000] was programmed in the Week section above. If [001] to
[005] was programmed in the Week Section above, then [000] to [006] represents Sunday to Saturday.
Hour
[000] to [022] represents the hour that Daylight Saving Time takes effect.
Increment
[001] to [002] represents the number of hours to advance the clock for Daylight Savings Time.
i
Do not program the Hour outside of the valid range or the time will not change.
Do not program the value of the Increment to be greater then the number of hours remaining in the current day.
Month
[001] to [012] represents January to December.
Week
[000] indicates that the day of the month is programmed in the Day section below. [001] to [005] represents weeks
1 to 5 of the month. Week 5 always represents the last week in the month, regardless of whether the number of
weeks in the month is 4 or 5.
Day
[001] to [031] represents day of the month if [000] was programmed in the Week section above. If [001] to [005]
was programmed in the Week Section above, then [000] to [006] represents Sunday to Saturday.
Hour
[000] or [023] represents the hour that Standard Time takes effect.
Increment
[001] or [002] represents the number of hours to roll back the clock for Daylight Saving Time.
i
If Daylight Saving Time occurs at Midnight program the time 2:00AM. Programming Descriptions
53
[176] Cross Zone/Police Code Timer
Program the time, in seconds (Cross Zone) or minutes (Police Code), that the panel uses to determine if a Cross Zone or Police Code
event has occurred. If [000] is programmed when using the Police Code feature, the panel generates a Police Code event (if any two
zones go into alarm during an armed-to-armed period). Valid entries are [001] to [255].
[190] No Activity Arming Pre-Alert
Program the time, in minutes, for the No Activity Arming Pre-Alert Duration. The keypad provides a steady tone warning the user
that
the system is arming. The user can either violate a zone or press any key to abort the arming sequence. Valid entries are [000] to [255].
Note:
Not CP-01 compliant.
[191] No Activity Arming Timer
Program the time, in minutes, for the No Activity Arm Timer. If Delay Zones are restored and no zone activity is detected for the time
programmed, the auto arm sequence starts. Valid entries are [000] to [255].
Note:
Not CP-01 compliant.
[202]-[209] Zone Assignments
Activates the selected zones. Zones 1-8 are ON by default. If a zone is enabled, it is supervised and operates according to the zone type
programmed. If a zone is not assigned, it is not supervised and all activity on the zone is ignored by the panel.
[301]-[303] Communication Telephone Numbers
[304] Call Waiting Cancel String
Program the digits required to disable call waiting. If enabled, the system dials the programmed string on the first dialing attempt.
Program unused digits with data [F]. This section is activated in Section [382] Opt [4].
[305] Fourth Telephone Number
[310] System Account Number
Program the System Account Number. Only the SIA format supports 6-digit account numbers. If a 4-digit account number is required,
program the last two digits as data [FF]. For formats other than SIA, program a HEX [A] for any digit [0] in the account number
being
used.
Auto Sync with Alternate Communicator
If the panel detects an alternate communicator module, it automatically synchronizes the system account code with programming sec-
tion [021] of the alternate communicator. Account codes of FFFFXX and 0000XX are not permitted. Synchronization takes place whe
n
Installer Programming is exited or DLS disconnects.
i
If a zone assignment is set, but no serial number is enrolled (zones 1 to 64), or the terminals are set as PGM outputs instead
of zone inputs (zones 33 and 34), then these zones appear in the bypass list.
The information in this section also applies to sections [302], [303] and [305].
These sections determine which type of communicator is activated in the event of an alarm (telephone, Cellular and Ethernet) and the
sequence that the system follows in the event of an unsuccessful communication.
• Entry of [D] followed by a [Telephone Number] terminated with “F” configures the section for telephone dialing.
E.g.: [D12223334444F]
• Entry of [D] followed by [CAA] terminated with “F” allows the system configuration to be determined by the alternate com-
municator module.
E.g.: [DCAAF]
• Enter [DCBBF] to configure the section for Ethernet Receiver 1
• Enter [DCCCF] to configure the section for Ethernet Receiver 2
• Enter [DCDDF] to configure the section for Cellular Receiver 1
• Enter [DCEEF] to configure the section for Cellular Receiver 2
Telephone Communications
All telephone number sections are 32 digits in length. Hexadecimal digits may be programmed in the telephone number to perform
additional functions as follows:
Enter [

][2][

] – HEX B to dial “


Enter [

][3][

] – HEX C to dial “#”
Enter [

][4][

] – HEX D for an additional dial tone search, as is required for PBX telephone systems
Enter [

][5][

] – HEX E to insert a 2-second pause in the telephone number
i
There is an automatic 2-second pause before additional dial tone searches are initiated.
HEX A is not used.
HEX F represents the end of the phone number (everything after F is ignored).
Pressing [#] in these sections exits and saves the entire phone number.
The panel does not attempt to communicate if no phone number is programmed. This applies to phone numbers 1 and 2.
See [301]-[303] Communication Telephone Numbers for details. SCW9055/9057 Wireless Alarm System
54
[320]-[327] Alarm Reporting Codes
These reporting codes are used by the communicator to transmit zone alarms and restores for zones 1 to 64.These reporting codes are
sent to the Alarm & Restore call direction group.
[328] Miscellaneous Alarm Reporting Codes
Duress Alarm
This reporting code is transmitted whenever a Duress code is used to perform any function on the system. The reporting code is
sent to
the Alarm & Restore call direction group.
Opening After Alarm
This reporting code is transmitted when the system is disarmed after an alarm; if an alarm occurred during the previous armed period.
The reporting code is sent to the Alarm & Restore call direction group.
Burglary Not Verified
When Cross Zoning (section [016] option [1]) is enabled, this reporting code is sent if the Cross Zone timer is initiated by the first cross
zone alarm, but it is not verified by a second cross zone alarm before the timer expires. This reporting code is sent to the Alarm &
Restore call direction group.
Alarm Canceled
If an alarm event is sent after transmission delay has expired, a cancel window time starts. This event is logged and transmitt
ed if a valid
access code is entered any time during this window. When this reporting code/event has been acknowledged by the central station, a
keypad will ring back. This reporting code is sent to the Alarm & Restore call direction group. See section [377] Communication
s Can-
cel Window.
[329] Priority Alarm and Restore Reporting Codes
(Fire, Auxiliary, Panic Alarms/Restores and Fail to
Report In)
If enabled and used to generate manual alarms, these reporting codes are sent to the Alarm & Restore Call Direction group.
[330]-[337] Tamper/Restore Reporting Codes, Zones 01-64
These reporting codes are used by the communicator to transmit zone tampers and restores for zones 1 to 34. These reporting cod
es are
sent to the Tamper Alarm & Tamper Restore call direction group of the system.
[338] Miscellaneous Tamper Reporting Codes
General System Tamper & Restore
These reporting codes are sent to the system Tamper Alarm & Tamper Restore call direction group when a panel tamper occurs.
Keypad Lockout
Whenever the system enters keypad lockout, this reporting code is sent to the system Tamper Alarm & Tamper Restore call directi
on group.
[339] Closing (Arming) Reporting Codes (Access Codes 1-16)
When the system is armed, a closing reporting code is transmitted after the exit delay expires for the user code that armed the system.
These reporting codes are sent to the Opening & Closing call direction group of the system. In addition, either “Armed in Stay Mode”
or “Armed in Away Mode” is logged to the event buffer.
Closing by Users (Duress)
When the system is armed by an access code programmed as duress, the corresponding closing reporting code is transmitted. This
reporting code is sent to the Opening & Closing call direction group.
[341] Miscellaneous Closing (Arming) Reporting Codes
Closing By Master Code 40
See [339] Closing by Users 1-16.
Automatic Zone Bypassing
This stops transmission of zone bypass information for systems set up for an automatic communication format (SIA and Contact ID).
Enter [00] to disable the automatic zone bypassing communications. If the zones are to be identified, they are transmitted with the Par-
tial Closing to the Opening & Closing call direction group. (24 Hour zone types transmit that they have been bypassed when the user
exits the bypassing menu).
Partial Closing
If zones were manually bypassed at the time of arming, this reporting code is transmitted to the central station with the Closing code to
warn of a security compromise. Automatic bypasses caused by Stay arming do not cause this code to be transmitted. Zones force a
rmed
by automatic arming transmit in the manner described above. If SIA is used, each zone is identified using the UB-XX (un-typed b
ypass)
identifier. The identified zones follow the partial closing code and precede the closing transmission. This reporting code is sent to the
Opening & Closing call direction group.
Special Closing
This reporting code is transmitted if the system is armed without an access code using Keyswitch Zone, Downloading, Quick Arm
[

][0], or Stay or Away function keys. In addition, either “Armed in Stay Mode” or “Armed in Away Mode” is logged to the event bu
f-
fer for all closing types. This reporting code is sent to the Opening & Closing call direction group.
i
Zone alarms transmit to the System Test Transmission Call Direction when they are being transmitted as part of the walk
test (enabled if section [382] option [2] is ON). Programming Descriptions
55
Exit Fault
If an Exit Error occurs and entry delay expires before the system is disarmed, this reporting code is sent. This reporting code is sent to
the Openings & Closings call direction group.
[342] Opening (Disarming) Reporting Codes (Access Codes 1-16)
When the system is disarmed, an opening Reporting code for the corresponding user is transmitted.
These reporting codes are sent to the Opening & Closing call direction group.
Opening by Users (Duress)
An opening by an access code programmed as duress results in a transmission of the corresponding opening reporting code. These
reporting codes are sent to the Opening & Closing call direction group.
[344] Miscellaneous Opening (Disarming) Reporting Codes
Opening By Master Code 40
See [342] Opening (Disarming) by Users 1-16.
Special Opening
If the system is disarmed (opened) by using keyswitch zone, an unidentified wireless key, or downloading, this reporting code is trans-
mitted to the Opening & Closing call direction group.
[345]-[346] Maintenance Alarm Reporting Codes
Battery Trouble & Restore
This trouble is reported if the standby battery is low or disconnected. These reporting codes are sent to the System Maintenance call
direction group.
AC Failure Trouble & Restore
If the AC supply has failed or has been restored, these reporting codes are sent. A programmable delay (001-255 minutes, sectio
n [377])
applies to both the trouble and the restore. These reporting codes are sent to the System Maintenance call direction group.
Fire Trouble & Restore
An open circuit or any Low Sensitivity, Tamper or Fault report from a wireless smoke detector, causes this trouble to be report
ed. These
reporting codes are sent to the System Maintenance call direction group.
Auxiliary Power Supply Trouble & Restore
If an auxiliary voltage supply trouble occurs (the Aux PTC has caused the auxiliary supply to stop outputting power), this trouble is
reported within 60 seconds. These reporting codes are sent to the System Maintenance call direction group.
TLM Alarm
The TLM Restore code is sent when the telephone trouble condition is restored. This reporting code is sent to the System Mainte
nance
call direction group.
General System Trouble & Restore
These reporting codes are transmitted via System Maintenance call direction group to report RF Jam troubles or hardware fault t
roubles
that occur on the system.
General System Supervisory Trouble & Restore
These reporting codes are transmitted via the System Maintenance call direction group when an enrolled TLXXX module has been
detected as absent or restored.
System Reset (Cold Start)
In the event of a total power failure, the Cold Start reporting code is transmitted to the central station when power is restored to the
panel. The reporting code is sent after 2 minutes to allow the panel to stabilize, although the event is logged in the buffer at 00:00. An
entry of 00 in this section disables the reporting code.
[347] Miscellaneous Maintenance Reporting Codes
Failure to Communicate (Phone Numbers 1, 2, 3 & 4)
When events fail to communicate to either telephone number, this reporting code is transmitted the next time a communication is suc-
cessful. The information is transmitted in the following order:

Old Event(s)

Failure To Communicate (Phone #1)

New Event(s)
The FTC reporting code does not follow any call direction “group.” It is sent to every group’s call directions upon transmission of
“failed to communicate” events. When event(s) fail to communicate to a telephone number, no attempt to communicate is made again
until another event is sent to that phone number.
i
If the delay zone that caused the exit error has cross zoning enabled, the exit fault and zone alarm still transmit if a second

zone is not violated. This is to inform the central station that the premise is not secure. The local alarm sequence follows
the cross zoning rules. The exit error is transmitted with the zone alarm that caused the fault, even if that zone has a trans-
mission delay enabled.
i
When the Aux Positive Temperature Co-efficient (electronic fuse) enters the open state due to a short or high current draw,
if the short is removed and a load is still applied, the Aux+ output will not recover. It must be powered down and back up
again to restore this condition. SCW9055/9057 Wireless Alarm System
56
DLS Lead In and Lead Out
When call-back is enabled, the control panel transmits the DLS Lead In reporting code before calling back the downloading compu
ter.
The DLS Lead Out reporting code is transmitted by the panel every time DLS has completed a successful DLS session with the cont
rol
panel. The DLS Lead In reporting code is transmitted in two ways: after the panel has been successfully called by DLS, but before the
panel calls DLS back via the downloading telephone number when call-back is enabled, or upon a user-initiated call-up. These report-
ing codes are sent to the System Maintenance call direction group.
General Zone Fault & Restore
This reporting code is sent whenever a zone has entered the fault state. This occurs when there is a short on DEOL hardwired zo
nes and/
or a loss of supervisory on a wireless zone. These reporting codes are sent to the System Maintenance call direction group.
Panel Firmware Update Begin/Successful
This reporting code is sent to the central station before the panel starts a firmware upgrade and after it has been successfull
y completed.
Delinquency Reporting Code
The Delinquency Reporting code is transmitted in one of two ways. If section [380] option [8] is OFF, it is transmitted when th
e system
has not been armed for the number of days programmed in section [377]. If section [380] option [8] is ON, it is transmitted when no
zone activity has been detected on the system for the number of hours programmed in section [377]. This reporting code is sent to the
System Maintenance call direction group.
General Zone Low Battery Alarm and Restore Codes
The following reporting codes are sent to report a Zone Low Battery condition on wireless zones. Individual zones are logged to the
event buffer. SIA and Contact I.D. formats identify the zone with the low battery condition. A zone low battery trouble is displayed
immediately. Transmission may be delayed (section [377]). These reporting codes are transmitted to the System Maintenance call
direc-
tion group.
Installer Lead In and Lead Out
The Installer Lead In and Lead Out reporting codes are sent when the panel enters and exits Installer Programming respectively.
[348] Test Transmission Reporting Codes
Walk Test Begin/End
These reporting codes are sent when the walk test is initiated and terminated. These codes precede and terminate the alarm reporting
codes for the zones that are activated during the walk test period, if the alarms are to be transmitted (section [382] option [
2]). The walk
test reporting codes are sent to the System Test Transmission call direction group.
Periodic Test Transmission
When the programmed interval and time of day have elapsed, this reporting code is transmitted. This reporting code is sent to the Sys-
tem Test Transmission call direction group.
System Test
When the [

][6][Master Code][4] command is used to perform a manual system test, this reporting code is sent to test the communica-
tor. This reporting code is sent to the System Test Transmission call direction group.
[350] Communications Format Options
This section requires four 2-digit entries (1 per phone number). See Appendix B: Communicator Format Options.
Auto Sync with Alternate Communicator Module
If the panel detects an alternate communicator module, it automatically writes the communications format programmed in this section
(03 contact ID or 04 SIA) to programming section [022] of the alternate communicator module. If a communications format has not
been programmed for phone numbers 1-4, 04 (SIA) is written to the alternate communicator module by default. If both SIA and Con
tact
ID are programmed, Contact ID is written to the alternate communicator module. Synchronization takes place when Installer Program-
ming is exited or DLS disconnects.
[351]-[376] Communicator Call Direction Options
Communicator call directions can be configured for 4 different phone numbers. Each reporting code falls under one of the following 5
groups:

Alarms & Restores

Openings & Closings

Tampers & Restores (including System Tampers)

System Maintenance Alarms & Restores

System Test Transmissions
Each group can be assigned to the following call directions:
Option 1: 1
st
Telephone Number
Option 2: 2
nd
Telephone Number
i
If DLS is terminated by an alarm, the alarm system will not communicate the DLS lead out event.
DLS Lead In/Lead Out reporting codes must be programmed as 00 (not communicated) if the DLS connection uses a sepa-
rate APN than used for alarm transmissions.
i
The Activity Delinquency timer is active when the system is armed in Stay mode, and not active in Away mode or Night
mode arming.
i
If phone numbers are programmed for use with the alternate communicator modules, the programmed format must be SIA or
Contact ID. Programming Descriptions
57
Option 3: 3
rd
Telephone Number
Option 4: 4
th
Telephone Number
[377] Communicator Variables
Program a 3-digit number for each program entry:
[378] Test Transmission Time of Day
Program the time the system will report a Test Transmission reporting event. Program 4 digits – [HHMM] using military standard.
For a test transmission at 11:00 pm, program data [2300]. Valid entries are [0000] to [2359], [9999] to disable.
[380] First Communicator Options
Swinger Shutdown (Alarms):
Maximum number of alarm/restore transmissions per zone. Valid entries: [000] to [014]. Program data
[000] to disable shutdown.
Swinger Shutdown (Tamper):
Maximum number of tamper alarm/restore transmissions per zone. Valid entries: [000] to [014]. Pro-
gram data [000] to disable shutdown.
Swinger Shutdown (Maintenance):
Maximum number of trouble alarm/restore transmissions per trouble condition. Valid entries:
[000] to [014]. Program data [000] to disable shutdown.
Communicator (Transmission) Delay:
Time, in seconds, panel delays reporting an alarm event. Valid entries: [000] to [255].
AC Failure Communication Delay:
Time in minutes or hours, panel delays reporting an AC trouble event or restore.
Note:
AC Restore communications follow the same delay.
TLM Trouble Delay:
Time, in 3 second checks, before the system considers the phone line disconnected. Valid entries: [003] to [255]
(e.g., 3 x 3 seconds = 9 seconds).
Note:
TLM Restore follows the same delay.
Test Transmission Cycle (Land Line):
Number of days or hours between test transmission reporting events. Valid entries: [001] to
[255]. [000] disables the Test Transmission.
Wireless Device Low Battery Delay:
Number of days the system delays reporting a wireless low battery to the central station.
Valid entries: [000] to [255]. Program data [000] for no delay.
Delinquency Transmission Delay:
Number of hours (Activity Delinquency) or days (Arming Delinquency) the panel delays before
transmitting the event to the central station. Valid entries: [001] to [255].
Communication Canceled Window (CP-01 only):
Time, in minutes, after an alarm has occurred that the system reports a Commu-
nication Cancel reporting event if the system is disarmed. The keypad displays “Communication Canceled” to indicate that the com-
munication canceled reporting event has been successfully sent to the monitoring station. Valid entries: [005] to [255].
Option Description
[1]
ON:
Communications Enabled. The system communicator is enabled.
OFF:
Communications Disabled. The communicator is disabled.
[2]
ON:
Restores on Siren Time-out. The system transmits alarm Restores if the zone is restored and the bell has timed out.
OFF:
Restores Follow Zones. The system transmits alarm restores immediately when the zone is restored.
[3]
ON:
Pulse Dialing. The panel uses rotary (pulse) dialing.
OFF:
DTMF Dialing. The panel uses touchtone (DTMF) dialing.
[4]-[5] Future Use
[6]
ON:
Alternating Backup Dialing Enabled. The communicator switches to the next backup number in the sequence after each
failed dialing attempt. This continues until communications are successful or the sequence has been repeated 5 times.
OFF:
Call Primary Number, Backup to secondary. If 5 attempts to communicate to the primary telephone number fail, the
communicator switches to the next backup and makes up to 5 more attempts. If communications failure continues the commu-
nicator will attempt the second and third backup numbers if designated.
[7]
Future Use
[8]
ON:
Delinquency Follows Zone Activity (Hours). The Delinquency feature follows zone activity.
OFF:
Delinquency Follows Arming (Days). The Delinquency feature follows arming. SCW9055/9057 Wireless Alarm System
58
[381] Second Communicator Options
[382] Third Communicator Options
[383] Fourth Communicator Options Code
Option Description
[1]
ON:
Opening After Alarm Keypad Ringback Enabled. When the Opening After Alarm reporting code is successfully trans-
mitted to a programmed telephone number, the keypad sounds a series of 8 beeps to confirm to the end user that the Opening
After Alarm Code was sent and received. This Ringback occurs for each Opening After Alarm code successfully reported.
OFF:
Opening After Alarm Ringback Disabled.
[2]
Future Use
[3]
ON:
SIA Uses Programmed Reporting Codes. The system uses programmed reporting codes when transmitting using the
SIA format.
OFF:
SIA Uses Automatic Reporting Codes. The system automatically generates all reporting codes transmitted.
[4]
ON:
Closing Confirmation Enabled. The system beeps the keypad 8 times after successfully transmitting a Closing reporting
event.
OFF:
Closing Confirmation Disabled. The keypad does not beep.
[5]-[6] Future Use
[7]
ON:
Contact ID Uses Programmed Reporting Codes. The system uses Contact ID format programmed reporting codes when
transmitting reporting codes.
OFF:
Contact ID Uses Automatic Reporting Codes. The system automatically generates all reporting codes transmitted.
[8]
Future Use
Option Description
[1]
Future Use
[2]
ON:
Alarm Communications Enabled During Walk Test. The system transmits all alarms during Walk Test.
OFF:
Alarm Communications Disabled During Walk Test. The system does not report alarm events during Walk Test.
[3]
ON:
Communications Canceled Message Enabled. The keypad displays the message “Communications Canceled” upon suc-
cessful transmission of the Communication Canceled reporting event.
OFF:
Communications Canceled Message Disabled. The keypad does not display these messages. (ON for SIA CP-01).
[4]
ON:
Call Waiting Cancel Enabled. The system dials the Call Waiting Cancel string on the first attempt to dial the central sta-
tion.
OFF:
Call Waiting Cancel Disabled. The system does not dial the Call Waiting Cancel string.
[5]
ON:
Alternate Communicator Module Enabled. This option enables supervision of the Cellular/Ethernet communicator. This
option must be ON to allow communications through the Cellular/Ethernet communicator.
Note: When this option is OFF, Installer Programming section [850]-[851] is not accessible.
OFF:
Alternate Communicator Module Disabled. The panel will not attempt to supervise the Cellular/Ethernet communica-
tor. When this option is OFF the Cellular/Ethernet communicator is disabled.
[6]
ON:
AC Failure Transmission Delay in Hours. The System AC Failure Communication Delay in section [377] is pro-
grammed in hours.
OFF:
AC Failure Transmission Delay in Minutes. The System AC Failure Communication Delay in section [377] is pro-
grammed in minutes.
[7]
ON:
Number of Dialing Attempts is 1 for Residential Dial. Number of Dialing Attempts is one when using Residential Dial
communication format.
OFF:
Residential Dialing Attempts is 5. Number of Dialing Attempts is five when using Residential Dial communication
format.
[8]
Future Use
Option Description
[1]
Future Use
[2]
ON:
Phone number 2 Backs Up Phone number 1. Phone number 2 backs-up phone number 1 if phone number 1 fails to com-
municate (FTC). Phone number 2 communicates in the same format as phone number 1.
OFF:
Phone number 2 is Independent. Phone number 2 does NOT back up phone number 1. Events are communicated to
phone number 2 (if enabled in Communicator Call Direction, section [351]-[376]), using the communicator format pro-
grammed in section [350].
[3]
ON:
Phone number 3 Backs up number 2. Phone number 3 backs-up phone number 2 if phone number 2 fails to communi-
cate (FTC). Phone number 3 communicates in the same format as phone number 2.
OFF:
Phone number 3 is Independent. Phone number 3 does NOT back up phone number 2. Events are communicated to
phone number 3 (if enabled in Communicator Call Direction, section [351]-[376]), using the communicator format pro-
grammed in section [350]. Programming Descriptions
59
[389] Alternate Communicator Fault Check Timer
The programmed number of poll commands that must be sent without valid poll responses before the panel generates a trouble condi-
tion. The number of valid checks happen at 3-second intervals. After the time-out an Ethernet or Cellular fault trouble is generated.
Valid entries are 003-255 for trouble annunciation and transmission. The trouble restore is delayed in the same manner as well.
[401] First Downloading Options
[4]
ON:
Phone number 4 Backs up number 3. Phone number 4 backs-up phone number 3 if phone number 3 fails to communi-
cate (FTC). Phone number 4 communicates in the same format as phone number 3.
OFF:
Phone number 4 is Independent. Phone number 4 does NOT back up phone number 3. Events are communicated to
phone number 4 (if enabled in Communicator Call Direction, section [351]-[376]), using the communicator format pro-
grammed in section [350].
[5]
ON:
FTC’ed Events Communicate.
The panel transmits Failure to Communicate (FTC) events if the digital communicator is
unsuccessful in communicating with any of the programmed telephone numbers. The FTC trouble/restore reporting code is
transmitted via the corresponding event call direction.
OFF:
FTC’ed Events Do Not Communicate. FTC events are not transmitted. FTC trouble/restore reporting codes are trans-
mitted via the Maintenance call direction group after the next successful transmission.
[6]
ON:
Account Code Error Check Enabled. Enabling this option ensures that a new account code is programmed. Upon
attempting to exit Installer Programming, the panel checks if a phone number is programmed in sections [301], [302], [303]
and [305]. If a phone number is programmed in any of these sections, the panel checks if the format is residential dial in sec-
tion [350]. If the format is residential dial, the check process is aborted. If the format is anything but residential dial, th
e panel
checks that the system account code has been changed from the default (FFFFFF) or has been programmed with an invalid
entry (0000XX or FFFFXX).
If the account code has not been programmed when the installer attempts to exit Installer Programming:
• The system turns on the trouble LED and sounds an error tone for 5 seconds.
• The prompt “Account Code Not Programmed[

]” is displayed on the keypad.
• When the 5-second error tone expires, the system automatically enters installer programming section [310] so the account
code can be programmed.
If the account code has been programmed, the panel operates normally.
OFF:
Account Code Error Check Disabled. The account code is not checked when exiting Installer Programming.
[7]
Future Use
[8]
ON:
Remote notification format is SIA. The panel sends SMS or other remote notifications to the communicator in SIA for-
mat.
OFF:
Remote notification format is CID. The panel sends SMS or other remote notifications to the communicator in Contact
ID format.
Option Description
[1]
ON:
Answering Machine/ Double Call Enabled. The system answers incoming calls for downloading (either Programmed
Number of Rings or Double Call).
OFF:
Answering Machine/ Double Call Disabled. The system does not answer incoming calls for double call attempts, but
still answers on Programmed Number of Rings.
These settings do not affect the 6 hour DLS downloading window on power up.
[2]
ON:
User Can Enable DLS Window. The user can enable downloading for the DLS downloading window (double call only)
using the [

][6] command.
OFF:
User Cannot Enable DLS Window. The user can not enable the DLS window using the [

][6] command.
[3]
ON:
Call Back Enabled. The system hangs up after a successful DLS connection and calls the computer back using the DLS
Phone Number (Section [402]).
OFF:
Call Back Disabled. The system stays connected to the computer.
[4]
ON:
User Initiated Call-up Enabled. The user can initiate a downloading session using the [

][6] command.
OFF:
User Initiated Call-up Disabled. The user cannot initiate a downloading session.
[5]
Future Use
[6]
ON:
300 Baud Panel Call-Up. When the user initiates a DLS connection, the panel connects and sends the initial header at 300
baud.
OFF:
110 Baud Panel Call-Up. When the user initiates a DLS connection, the panel connects and sends the initial header at
110 baud. The panel then switches to 300 baud in order to receive the response from the DLS computer.
[7]
Future Use
[8]
ON:
Alternate Communicator DLS Always. When this feature is enabled, the SCW9055/57 responds to DLS requests through
the Alternate Communicator IP or Cellular paths at any time regardless of whether the DLS window is active or not. Note: If
an incorrect DLS Access Code is entered 5 times in a row when trying to establish a connection, the panel locks out the alter-
nate communicator DLS access until the next hour roll-over.
OFF:
Alternate Communicator Follows DLS Window. When this feature is disabled, the SCW9055/57 only responds to DLS
requests through the alternate communicator IP or Cellular paths when the DLS window is active. The DLS window is active
following a power up of the control panel, or when the user enables it by pressing [5] while in the [*][6] User Functions menu. SCW9055/9057 Wireless Alarm System
60
[402] DLS Downloading Computer’s Telephone Number
The Downloading Computer Telephone Number is used for Call Back and User Initiated DLS functions. Program the phone number as
required. HEX digits can be included for special applications:
HEX [A]
Not used
HEX [B]
Simulates a [

] key press
HEX [C]
Simulates a [#] key press
HEX [D]
Additional dial tone search
HEX [E]
2-second pause
HEX [F]
End of phone number marker
[403] DLS Downloading Access Code
Program the 6-digit Downloading Access Code. Upon connection, the system only connects to the downloading computer if the
Downloading Access Code programmed matches the Downloading Access Code programmed in the computer file.
Note:
The DLS Downloading Access Code must be changed from it's default value.
[404] Panel ID Code
Program the 6-digit Panel Identification Code. This code is used by the downloading computer to verify the correct account is calling
back (Call Back feature) or to identify which customer account file should be used (User Initiated DLS features).
[405] Double Call Timer
Program the maximum time in seconds, between calls, when connecting to the panel using the Double Call feature.
[406] Number of Rings to Answer On
The value in this section determines how many rings the panel will automatically pick up on in order to establish a DLS connection.
[501]-[502] PGM Output Attributes
Allows the installer to customize PGM1 and PGM2 Attributes. The following attributes can be enabled or disabled for each PGM out-
put. When a PGM option is changed, the corresponding PGM’s attributes are defaulted.
i
If Section [401] Option 1 and Section [406] are both enabled, either one works depending on how the installer calls the premises.
Option Description
The following attributes are available for PGM Output Types [01], [05]-[08] and [17]-[18]
[1]-[2] Future Use
[3]
Output Level
ON:
Output activates (switch to Ground) when the event occurs.
OFF:
Output de-activates (switch to open) when the event occurs.
[4]
Output Options
ON:
Output Pulsed. When using [

][7], the output activates for the duration programmed in the PGM output timer, section [170].
OFF:
Output On/Off. The output toggles between on and off when the corresponding [

][7] command is entered.
The following attribute is available only for PGM Output Types [11] and [19]-[20].
[5]
Access Code Options
ON:
Access code required for activation.
OFF:
No access code required for activation.
The following attributes are available for the System Trouble PGM option [09]
System Trouble PGM (Type 09)
[1] Service Required
[2] A.C. Failure
[3] Telephone Line Fault
[4] Communications (Failure to Communicate)
[5] Device (Fire) Fault / WLS Zone Supervisory Fault Enabled
[6] Device Tamper
[7] Device Low Battery
[8] Loss of Clock Programming Descriptions
61
[591]-[592] Inactivity Timers 1 & 2 Start and End Times
Inactivity timers are used to create two windows to monitor 24-Hour. non-alarm zone activity. They are [591] Inactivity Timer 1 Start,
Inactivity Timer 1 End, [592] Inactivity Timer 2 Start, and Inactivity Timer 2 End. Enter two 4-digit decimal numbers in these
two sec-
tions. Valid entries for each 4-digit decimal entry are 0000 to 2359. Enter 9999 to disable. The Failed to Arm reporting code f
ollows the
alarms and restores call directions.
[600] 2-way Audio Control Options 1 (applies to SCW9057 only)
The following attributes are available for the System Event PGM option [10]
System Event PGM (Type 10)
[1] Burglary
Delay, Instant, Interior, Stay/Away, Night, and 24 Hour Burglary Zone Types
[2] Fire
Key, Fire zone
[3] Panic
Key and Panic zones
[4] Medical
Key, Medical, and Emergency zones
[5] Supervisory
Supervisory, Auxiliary, Freeze, and Water zones
[6] Priority
Gas, CO, 24-Hour Heat and 24-Hour non-Latching Tamper zones
[7] Duress
Duress alarms
[8] Output Options
ON:
Output Follows PGM Timer (Attribute 8). The output activates for the duration pro-
grammed for the PGM output timer (section [170])
OFF:
Output is Latched. The output is active until a valid access code is entered.
i
If a system event PGM is programmed to follow the command output timer (Attribute 8 On), all other PGM attributes must
be enabled.
Option Description
[1]
ON:
Tampers Enabled. The Talk/Listen-in session initiates for tamper conditions.
OFF:
Tampers Disabled. 2-way Audio is disabled for tamper conditions.
[2]
ON:
Openings and Closings Enabled. The Talk/Listen-in session initiates for Openings & Closings events.
OFF:
Openings and Closings Disabled. 2-way Audio is disable for Openings & Closings events.
[3]
ON:
[A] Key Alarm Enabled. The Talk/Listen-in session initiates for [A] Key Alarm.
OFF:
[A] Key Alarm Disabled. 2-way Audio is disabled for [A] Key Alarm.
[4]
ON:
[P] Key Alarm Enabled. The Listen-in session initiates for [P] Key Alarm if the [P] Key is programmed to be Silent. If
the [P] Key is programmed to be audible, the 2-way audio session will be Talk/Listen-in.
OFF:
[P] Key Alarm Disabled. 2-Way Audio is disabled for [P] Key Alarm.
[5]
ON:
Duress Alarm Enabled (Listen). The Listen-in session initiates for Duress Alarm.
OFF:
Duress Alarm Disabled. 2-Way Audio is disabled for Duress Alarm.
[6]
ON:
Opening after Alarm Enabled. The Talk/Listen-in session initiates for Opening After Alarm.
OFF:
Opening after Alarm Disabled. 2-Way Audio is disabled for Opening After Alarm.
[7]
ON:
Siren Active during 2-way Audio Verification. The sounder will remain active during a 2-way Audio session when an
audible alarm is present
OFF:
Siren Silent during 2-way Audio Verification. The sounder will be silent when a 2-Way Audio session begins when an
audible alarm is present, allowing the user to hear the operator. The sounder will resume operation for the timeout duration if

the panel has not been disarmed at the end of the 2-way session.
i
This option must be ON for UL Listed Installations.
[8]
ON:
Two-Way Audio is Initiated by the CS Operator: The alarm sounds but the 2-way audio session does not begin until the
central station operator activates it. The siren turns off once the 2-way audio session has begun.
OFF:
Two-Way Audio Session is Immediate: The siren turns off and the 2-way audio session begins immediately after send-
ing the event. SCW9055/9057 Wireless Alarm System
62
[601] 2-way Audio Control Options 2 (applies to SCW9057 only)
[609] Module Tamper Reporting Codes
This section is used for programming keypad and siren tamper reporting codes. A value of 00 can be entered to disable individual
reporting codes.
[610] Alternate Communicator Receiver Trouble Reporting Codes
This section is used for programming alternate communicator receiver trouble reporting codes. A value of 00 can be entered to disable
individual reporting codes.
[611] Repeater Tamper Reporting Codes
This section is used for programming WS4920/8920 tamper reporting and AC loss codes. A value of 00 can be entered to disable indi-
vidual reporting codes.
[700] Automatic Clock Adjust
The value entered here adds or subtracts seconds at the end of each day to compensate for inaccuracies in the system time. Vali
d entries
are 00-99, with 60 seconds being the default. Monitor the time lost by the panel over a period of time to determine the average value
required for this section.
Example: Panel loses an average of 9 seconds a day. Instead of loading 60 seconds for the last minute of each day, program the panel to
load 51 seconds with the use of section [700]. This will speed up the panel by 9 seconds every day, thereby fixing the problem.
[701] First International Options
Option
Description
[1]
ON:
Talk/Listen on Phone #1 Enabled. If Talk/Listen is required for an event, the panel initiates a Talk/Listen session with
the central station on phone #1.
OFF:
Talk/Listen on Phone #1 Disabled. The panel does not request a Talk/Listen session on Phone #1.
[2]
ON:
Talk/Listen on Phone #2 Enabled. If Talk/Listen is required for an event, the panel initiates a Talk/Listen session with
the central station on phone #2.
OFF:
Talk/Listen on Phone #2 Disabled. The panel does not request a Talk/Listen session on Phone #2.
i
When using redundant communications with phone line and Cellular, if 2-way audio is enabled, a 2-way voice session is
established over both paths at the same time.
[3]
ON:
Talk/Listen on Phone #3 Enabled. If Talk/Listen is required for an event, the panel initiates a Talk/Listen session with
the central station on phone #3.
OFF:
Talk/Listen on Phone #3 Disabled. The panel does not request a Talk/Listen session on Phone #3.
[4]
ON:
Talk/Listen on Phone #4 Enabled. If Talk/Listen is required for an event, the panel initiates a Talk/Listen session with
the central station on phone #4.
OFF:
Talk/Listen on Phone #4 Disabled. The panel does not request a Talk/Listen session on Phone #4.
[5]-[8] Future Use
Option
Description
[1]
ON:
50 Hz AC. Configures the system for 50Hz AC.
OFF:
60 Hz AC. Configures the system for 60Hz AC.
[2]
ON:
Time Base - Internal Crystal. The system uses the internal crystal for the internal panel clock.
OFF:
Time Base - AC Line. The system uses the AC frequency for the internal panel clock.
[3]
ON:
AC/DC Arming Inhibit Enabled. The system inhibits arming if a Low Battery or AC trouble condition is present.
OFF:
AC/DC Arming Inhibit Disabled. Arming is not inhibited.
[4]
ON:
All System Tampers Require Installer Reset. All Tamper troubles latch and arming is inhibited. Enter Installer Pro-
gramming to clear the trouble condition and return to normal operation.
OFF:
All System Tampers Follow Restore. Tamper troubles do not latch and do not inhibit arming. Manual bypassing of a
zone does not bypass the tamper or fault states (DEOL).
[5]
ON:
6-digit User Access Codes. All access codes are 6 digits long.
OFF:
4-digit User Access Codes. All access codes are 4 digits long.
[6]
ON:
Busy Tone Detection Enabled. The system hangs up if a busy tone is detected.
OFF:
Busy Tone Detection Disabled. The system does not detect busy tones.
[7]
ON:
High Capacity Battery Charge. Enable this option when using the 3.6Ah battery (part # 17-152). The battery is charged
for 48 hours after power-up. This option is enabled by default for panels shipped with a 3.6Ah battery.
OFF:
Standard Capacity Battery Charge. Enable this option when using the 1.5Ah battery (part # 17-145). The battery is
charged for 24 hours after power-up. This option is enabled by default for panels shipped with a 1.5Ah battery.
Note:
For ULC Residential Fire Installations, a 3600 mAh Ni-MH battery pack must be used and this option must be ON in
order to provide 24 Hr. battery standby plus 5 minutes alarm annunciation.
[8]
Future Use Programming Descriptions
63
[702] Second International Options
[703] Delay Between Dialing Attempts
Program the time the system waits between dialing attempts to transmit a reporting event to the central station. Valid entries
are [001] to
[255].
[800] Door Chime Options for Zones 1-64
[804]-[001]-[064] Wireless Device Serial Number
These sections are for manual enrollment of wireless device electronic serial numbers (ESN).
• See [804][101]-[116] for one-way and two-way wireless key enrollment.
• See [804][201]-[204] for two-way keypad enrollment.
• See [804][301]-[304] for two-way siren enrollment.
This is a 6-digit (one-way) or 8-digit (2-way) entry. For toggling entries between decimal and hexadecimal values, press
[

].
Option
Description
[1]
ON:
Pulse Dialing Make/Break ratio is 33/67. The communicator uses 33/67 make/break ratio when pulse dialing.
OFF:
Pulse Dialing Make/Break ratio is 40/60. The system uses 40/60 make/break ratio.
[2]
ON:
Force Dialing Enabled. The system dials regardless of the presence of dial tone after the first attempt.
OFF:
Force Dialing Disabled. The system dials only if dial tone is detected.
[3]
Future Use
[4]
ON:
1600Hz Handshake. 1600Hz handshake used.
OFF:
Standard Handshake. Standard handshake is used.
[5]
ON:
ID Tone Enabled. The system generates a tone every 2 seconds indicating digital equipment is making the call rather
than a voice call.
OFF:
ID Tone Disabled. The system does not generate a tone.
[6]
ON:
2100 Hz. ID Tone. The tone generated (2100Hz.) indicates that digital equipment is making the call.
OFF:
1300 Hz. ID Tone. The tone is 1300Hz.
[7]-[8] Future Use
Keypads and indoor sirens can annunciate one of four different door chime tones for each zone on the system.
Each section contains the following chime options:

Enable one door chime option for each zone.

If more than one option is enabled, the highest numerical option enabled takes precedence.
For example: If options 3 and 1 are both enabled, then the zone sounds option 3 - “Ding-Dong.”

If all door chime options are disabled, the keypad/siren does not sound a door chime tone for that particular zone.
Option
Description
[1]
ON:
Standard Door Chime Enabled. Traditional door chime tone found on other DSC keypads (6 quick beeps).
OFF:
Standard Door Chime Disabled.
[2]
ON:
“Bing-Bong” Door Chime Enabled.
OFF:
“Bing-Bong” Door Chime Disabled.
[3]
ON:
“Ding-Dong” Door Chime Enabled.
OFF:
“Ding-Dong” Chime Disabled.
[4]
ON:
4-second Alarm Tone Door Chime Enabled. The keypad/siren sounds a medium volume alarm signal for 4 seconds.
OFF:
4-second Alarm Tone Door Chime Disabled.
[5]-[8]
Future Use
One-way Devices
The first digit of a 6-digit serial number for one-way devices identifies the type of device as indicated below:
2
Door/Window Contact, Flood Sensor or Wireless Repeater
3
PIR or Glass Break Detector
4
Smoke Detector
5
Panic Pendant
8
Carbon Monoxide Detector
i
Leading 00s must be entered for one-way wireless devices with six-digit serial numbers (E.g.,
SN 234567 must be entered as 00234567). SCW9055/9057 Wireless Alarm System
64
[804][081] Wireless Supervisory Window
This entry is used to program the length of time a wireless device must be absent from the system before a fault is generated.
The wire-
less supervisory window is calculated by multiplying the programmed value by 15 minutes.
Valid entries are 04 to 96 which correlates to 1 to 24 hours. The default value for North America is 96 (24 hours) and 08 (2 hours) for
Europe.
[804][082]-[089] Zone Transmitter Supervision Options
Program these sections if the zone transmitter will be supervised. All zones are enabled for supervision by default.
[804][101]-[116] Wireless Key Serial Number
These sections are used to enter the wireless key serial numbers. Each 2-way serial number is an 8-digit hexadecimal entry. To toggle
entries between decimal and hexadecimal values, press [

]. One-way serial numbers are 6-digits. “00” must be added to the start of a 6-
digit serial number.
[804][141]-[156] Wireless Key Function Key Options
Up to 6 unique functions can be programmed for each wireless key. Each section requires four 2-digit entries. The following table
describes each programmable function.
[804][181]-[182] Wireless Key Enable/Disable
These sections enable each individual key enrolled on the system. The keys are all enabled on the system by default.
[804][201]-[204] Wireless Keypad Serial Number
These sections are used to enter the wireless keypad and IT-410 serial numbers. The number is an 8-digit hexadecimal entry. To toggle
between decimal and hexadecimal value entries, press [

].
[804][301]-[304] Wireless Siren Serial Number
These sections are used to enter the wireless siren serial numbers. The number is an 8-digit hexadecimal entry. To toggle betwe
en deci-
mal and hexadecimal value entries, press [

].
[804][311]-[314] Wireless Siren Options for Sirens 1-4
i
This timer may run the programmed time plus up to the number of minutes programmed in this section. For example, the
European default is 2 hours, but the actual time could be as long as 2 hours and 8 minutes. The North American default is
24 hours, but the actual time could be as long as 25 hours and 36 minutes.
Note:
UL fire listings require a 4 Hr setting (4 Hrs = 16, 16x15 minutes).
i
DSC does NOT recommend supervision of panic pendants, because they may be removed from the premises.
Entry Description
DSC Wireless Key
00
Null Key (Not Used)
YES
03
Stay Arm
YES
04
Away Arm
YES
05
[

][9] No-Entry Arm
[

][9] No-Entry Arm can be used if the wireless key being used is identified.
06
[

][4] Chime On / Off
YES
13
Command Output 1 [

][7][1]
[

][7][1] commands can be used with an access code if the wireless keys are identified.
14
Command Output 2 [

][7][2]
[

][7][2] commands can be used with an access code if the wireless keys are identified.
16
[

][0] Quick Exit
YES
17
[

][1] Reactivate Stay/Away Zones YES
25
Instant Stay Arm
YES
27
Disarm (Off)
Disarming can be used with an access code, as long as the wireless keys are identified.
29
Auxiliary Alarm
YES
30
Panic Alarm
YES
33
Night Arm
YES
Each section contains the following 8 options:
Option Description
[1]
ON:
Siren Enabled. The WT49X1 activates at full volume for fire, burglary, and CO alarm conditions. This option also
enables walk test and system test indications for WT49X1 modules, and placement test, walk test, and system test indications
for WT4911 modules.
OFF:
Siren Disabled. The WT49X1 does not activate for fire, burglary, CO Alarm, walk test or system test indications. Place-
ment test is still sounded by WT4901 modules.
[2]
ON:
Buzzer Notifications Enabled. The siren activates audible signals for entry/exit delays, and 24 hour buzzer zone alarms.
This may be desirable for indoor sirens, but not outdoor sirens.
OFF:
Buzzer Notifications Disabled. Audible signals are not sent.
[3]
ON:
Door Chime Enabled. The siren activates for door chime conditions.
OFF:
Door Chime Disabled. The siren does not activate for door chime conditions. Programming Descriptions
65
[804][320] Global Siren Options

[804][330] Maximum Outdoor Siren Activation Timer
This value determines the maximum time the wireless siren sounds before automatically turning off.
[804][401]-[404] Wireless Repeater Programming
These sections are used to enroll up to four WS4920 repeaters. During quick enroll, select slot 00 to enroll the device as a re
peater. The
next available section ([401]-[404]) is displayed. Repeaters are placement tested using section [907].
Note:
For Repeater supervision, ensure that dip switch 3 on the repeater is in the OFF state.
[804][900] General Wireless Options

[4]
ON:
Trouble Beeps Enabled. The siren activates for trouble beep conditions. Trouble beeps are sounded until any key on the
keypad is pressed or until all trouble conditions are restored. This is intended for indoor sirens, but not outdoor sirens or s
irens
that are mounted in a sleeping area.
OFF:
Trouble Beeps Disabled. The siren does not activate for trouble beeps.
[5]
ON:
Bell Squawks Enabled. The siren activates programmed bell squawk conditions (e.g., arming, disarming, disarming with
alarms in memory). This may be desirable for outdoor sirens, but not indoor sirens. These squawks are sounded at full alarm
volume.
OFF:
Bell Squawks Disabled. The siren does not activate for bell squawk conditions.
[6]
ON:
Strobe Enabled (WT4911 only). The strobe activates for alarms, placement test, walk test, system test and arm/disarm
squawk indications. The strobe can be used to identify a system alarm before entering the premises.
OFF:
Strobe Disabled. The strobe does not activate.
[7]
ON:
Buzzer Alarm / Strobe Follows Bell Time Out. Indoor Siren - If the indoor siren is set for buzzer notifications (option 2),
buzzer alarms, such as 24 Hr buzzer zone types are shut off after they have been active for the duration of BTO. Outdoor siren:
If
the strobe is enabled on the outdoor siren (option 6), the strobe shuts off once the siren is shut off at the end of the bell duration.
OFF:
Buzzer Alarms / Strobe Follows Alarm Condition. Indoor siren - The siren sounds the buzzer alarm until the alarm con-
dition has been acknowledged (silenced) at the keypad. Outdoor siren: The strobe continues until an access code has been
entered at a system keypad, or a successful disarming request has been serviced.
[8]
ON:
Siren Tamper Enabled. Tamper conditions from the siren generate a tamper trouble. The panel logs and communicates
the event.
OFF:
Siren Tamper Disabled. Tamper conditions from the siren do not generate a tamper trouble. The panel logs and com-
municates the event. If a siren tamper condition is present in [
*
][2], turning off this option clears the trouble from the system.
i
This option must be Off for CP-01 compliance.
When these options are enabled or disabled, they affect all wireless devices on the system.
Option
Description
[1]
ON:
Tamper Activates Siren / Strobe While Disarmed. When the system is in a disarmed state, a tamper condition from any
enrolled siren causes the system sirens and strobes to activate.
OFF:
Tamper Does not Activate Siren / Strobe While Disarmed. When the system is in a disarmed state, a tamper condition
from any enrolled siren will not cause the system sirens and strobes to activate.
[2]
ON:
Pre-Alarm Signal Enabled. When the system begins entry delay the entry delay time is sent to the wireless siren. If the
wireless siren does not receive a disarm command during the entry delay time, the siren will go into alarm.
OFF:
Pre-Alarm Signal Disabled. When the system begins entry delay no entry delay time is sent to the wireless siren. The
siren will not go into alarm until it receives a signal from the panel to tell it to go into alarm.
[3]-[8] Future Use
When these options are enabled or disabled, they affect all wireless devices on the system.
Option Description
[1]
ON:
Repeater Harsh Placement Test Enabled. When interference is present between the Repeater and the SCW9055/57, this
functionality allows the installer to place the Repeater closer to the receiver to establish a stronger communication path. This
option does not affect or change the location characteristics of any other devices. This option is automatically disabled when
exiting Installer Programming.
Note:
Only use this option when interference is detected using the Repeater placement test (Yellow LED on Repeater is ON)
or the Receiver Placement Test (section [907] on the SCW9055/57).
OFF: Repeater Harsh Placement Test Disabled.
[2]-[6] Future Use
[7]
ON:
RF Jam Disabled. RF Jam conditions are NOT detected, displayed and communicated.
OFF:
RF Jam Enabled. RF Jam conditions are detected, displayed and communicated.
[8]
Future Use SCW9055/9057 Wireless Alarm System
66
[850] Cellular Signal Strength (DSC Communicator)
This section displays the Cellular network signal strength on the LCD (“Cellular” is displayed on the first line). Scroll to the second line
to view. If the SIM card is activated, the second line displays and the signal strength bars. If the SIM card is not activated,
is dis-
played beside the signal bars. Maximum signal strength is 5 bars.
[851] Alternate Communicator Module Programming
For information regarding programming the Alarm.com alternate communicator, refer to Chapter 7 Alarm.com Communicator. For
information regarding programming the DSC Communicator, refer to the Communicator Installation manual.
[898] Wireless Device Enrollment
-
See Section 2 of this manual
.
[899] Template Programming
-
See Section 3 of this manual.
[900] Panel Version
The system displays the version of the control panel (for example, [0100] indicates panel version 1.00).
[904] Wireless Device Placement Test
See Chapter 2 for details.
[905] Wireless Keypad Placement Test
See Chapter 2 for details.
[906] Wireless Siren Placement Test
See Chapter 2 for details.
[907] Wireless Repeater Placement Test
See Chapter 2 for details.
[908] Wireless Modules
This section displays all wireless modules enrolled on the alarm system. View enrolled module names and slot numbers using the
scroll
keys. e.g., an indoor siren enrolled on slot one is displayed as 'WT49X1 1'.
[990] Installer Lockout Enable
Enter Section [990][Installer Code][990] to enable this feature. A hardware default cannot be performed when the Installer Lock
out fea-
ture is ON. If the panel is powered up, the system chatters the line seizure relay 10 times to indicate the feature is ON.
[991] Installer Lockout Disable
Enter Section [991][Installer Code][991] to turn the Installer Lockout feature OFF.
[992] Alternate Communicator Module Label Broadcast
This section allows the installer to broadcast the partition and zone labels stored in the panel to the Alternate Communicator module
SMS label programming sections. Press [*] to broadcast the labels or [#] to exit the section. An error tone is sounded if the alternate
communicator module is disabled (section [382] option 5) or is not present. Note: Label broadcast must be initiated by the SCW9
055/
57 main unit.
[996] Restore Wireless Device Programming Factory Defaults
Enter Section [996][Installer Code][996] to return wireless programming to factory defaults.
[998] Restore Panel Default Programming
Enter Section [998][Installer Code][998] to return control panel programming (including 2-way Audio options) to factory default
s.
[999] Restore Factory Default Programming
Enter Section [999][Installer Code][999] to return system programming to factory defaults.
Hardware Reset (Default) Main Control Panel
Perform the following to default the main control panel:
1.
Power down the system completely.
2.
Connect a short between I/O 1 and I/O 2 on the control panel (remove all other wires from these terminals).
3.
Power up the control panel (AC power only) for 10 full seconds.
4.
Power down the control panel, remove short between I/O 1 and I/O 2.
5.
Power up the control panel.
Local Keypad Programming
To access Keypad Programming, enter [

][8][Installer’s Code][

].
To return to System Programming, press [

].
i
Wireless device programming and keypad programming are not defaulted.
To default Labels, see Section [996] Label Reset in Keypad Programming.
To default Wireless Devices, see Section [996] above.
i
Except for labels, all programming including wireless device programming and keypad programming is returned to factory
defaults. To default labels, see Section [996] Label Reset in Keypad Programming. Programming Descriptions
67
[000] Keypad Function Key Programming
This section is used to program the keypad function keys. To access enter [

][000] from Installer Programming. Enter digits 1 to 5 to
select a function key (F1-F5) for programming. Key in a 2-digit entry to assign a function to the key. The system returns to the key
selection screen (in section [000]). Changes to this programming section affect only the keypad used to program the changes.
Function Key Options
i
Function keys must be held for 2 seconds to perform the described function.
Function keys only perform the intended function if the system is not busy.
Pressing function keys programmed with option numbers designated “Future Use” causes the keypad to display “Function Not
Available” and sound an error tone.
00
Null Key:
(Not Used) The key does not perform any function or give any acknowledgement beeps when pressed.
01-02 Future Use
03
Stay Arm:
The system arms with all Stay/Away and Night zones auto-bypassed even if delay zones are violated during the
exit delay. This key only works while the system is disarmed, or armed in the Away mode. The panel logs “
Armed in Stay
Mode
” for this closing type. If there are no Stay/Away zone types programmed on the system, the system arms in Away mode,
and the panel logs “
Armed in Away Mode.

04
Away Arm:
The system arms with all Stay/Away and Night zones active even if no delay zones are violated during the exit
delay. This key only works while the system is disarmed, armed in the Stay or Night Mode, or during the Exit Delay. The
panel logs “
Armed in Away Mode
” for this closing type.
05
No-Entry Arm [

][9]:
After pressing this key, enter a valid access code. The system arms with No Entry on Delay zones and
all Stay/Away and Night zones are auto-bypassed even if delay zones are violated during the exit delay. The exit delay is silen
t
for this arming type. This key can be used in the armed or disarmed state to allow the user to turn Entry Delay on and off.
Entry of a valid access code is required after pressing this key to perform the function when the system is disarmed.
06
Chime ON/OFF [

][4]:
This key enables (3 beeps) and disables (steady tone) the chime. It functions similarly to entering
[

][4]. This key functions when the system is armed or disarmed.
07
Future Use
08
Bypass Mode [

][1]:
Pressing this key puts the keypad into Zone Bypass mode. It is similar to entering [

][1] while dis-
armed. If an access code is required for bypassing (Section [015] Option [5]), the user must press the function key to enter
bypass mode then enter the access code before entry is permitted. This key only works while the system is disarmed.
09-12 Future Use
13
Command Output #1 [

][7][1]:
Pressing this key is the equivalent of entering [

][7][1] to activate the associated PGM. An
access code may be required before the output is activated, depending on attribute 5 of the output. This key works whether the
system is armed or disarmed.
14
Command Output #2 [

][7][2]:
Pressing this key is the equivalent of entering [

][7][2] to activate the associated PGM. An
access code may be required before the output is activated, depending on attribute 5 of the output. This key works whether the
system is armed or disarmed.
15
Future Use
16
Quick Exit [

][0]:
Pressing this key performs the Quick Exit function and is the same as entering [

][0] while armed. This
key only works while the system is armed. The Quick Exit feature must be enabled (section [015] Option [3]).
17
Reactivate Stay/Away Zones [

][1]:
Pressing this key removes (or re-enables) the automatic bypass on all Stay/Away zones
on the system. It is the same as entering [

][1] while armed. If Night zones are programmed, the system arms in night mode if
this key is pressed while stay armed. If no Night zones are programmed, the system arms in Away mode. The panel logs the
appropriate arming log to the event buffer. If armed in Night or Away mode, this key switches the system back to Stay mode.
Pressing this key does not switch the system from Night to Away. This key only works when the system is armed.
18-24 Future Use
25
Instant Stay Arm:
This feature operates similarly to the Stay arming function key except for the following: When this func-
tion key is pressed for 2 seconds, no acknowledgement beeps are sounded, there is no exit delay, and the system arms immedi-
ately. The panel logs “
Armed in Stay Mode
” for this closing type. If no Stay/Away zone types are programmed on the system,
the system arms in Away mode with an audible exit delay (for the duration programmed in section [005]), and the panel logs
Armed in Away Mode
.
Note:
This function key should not be used on CP-01 panels.
26-32 Future Use
33
Night Arm:
The system arms with Night zones auto-bypassed even if delay zones are violated during the exit delay. This key
only works while the system is disarmed or armed in the Stay Mode. The panel logs
Armed in Night Mode
for this closing
type. If no Night zone types are programmed on the system, the system arms in Away mode with an audible exit delay (for the
duration programmed in section [005]), and the panel logs
Armed
in Away Mode
. The function key must be pressed for 2 sec-
onds. No acknowledgement beeps are sounded and the exit delay is silent. SCW9055/9057 Wireless Alarm System
68
[001]-[064] Label Programming (Zone 1-64)
Zone and other labels in these sections can be customized.
Default labels are in English and do not change when an alternate language is selected.
Labels can be programmed locally or downloaded/uploaded using DLS and Connect 24 interactive software.
Label Library
The Label Library is a database of words commonly used when programming labels. Individual words can be combined as needed. e.g
.,
Front + Door. Each line of the display supports a maximum of 14 characters. If a word will not fit on a line, scroll right unti
l the cursor
appears at the first character of the second line then add the word.
To program a custom label using the Label Library:
1.
Enter keypad programming and select the label to change. e.g., [*][8][Installer Code][*][001] (to program the label for zone 01).
2.
Press [*] to open the “Select Options” menu.
3.
Press [*] again to select the “Words” option.
4.
Enter the 3-digit number corresponding to a word (see Words Table below) or use the scroll keys [] to view words in the
library.
5.
Press [*] to select the word.
6.
To add another word, repeat the above procedure from step 2.
7.
To add a space, press the right scroll key [>].
8.
To clear characters, select “Clear to End” or “Clear Display” from the “Select Options” menu.
9.
To save the current label, press [*] to access the “Select Options” menu, scroll left []
[
*
]
[#]
[0]
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[7]
[8]
[9]
Display Left (Previous character position)
Display Right (Next character position)
[SELECT]
[ESCAPE]
[SPACE]
[A], [B], [C], [1]
[D], [E], [F], [2]
[G], [H], [I], [3]
[J], [K], [L], [4]
[M], [N], [O], [5]
[P], [Q], [R], [6]
[S], [T], [U], [7]
[V], [W], [X], [8]
[Y], [Z], [9], [0]
2.
Scroll to the desired character’s location using the
Keys.
3.
Enter the number of the corresponding character
group until the desired character is displayed.
Example:
Press the “2” key 3 times to enter the letter “F.”
Press the “2” key 4 times to enter the number
“2.”
4.
Press [*] to access the “Select Option” menu.
Scroll to “Save” then press [*] to save the label.
WORDS
- This option provides access to the Label Library, a collection of words commonly used when programming
labels.
ASCII ENTRY
- This option is for entering uncommon characters, or as a primary method for programming labels. 255
character entries are available, although some entries are duplicated. Use the [] keys to scroll through the characters or

enter a 3-digit number from 000-255. Press the [

] key to enter a character in the label.
CHANGE CASE
- This option toggles the letter entry between upper case letters (A, B, C) and lower case letters (a, b, c).
CLEAR TO END
- This option clears the display from the character where the cursor is located to the end of the display.
CLEAR DISPLAY
- This option sets all characters in a label to “space” or cleared.
SAVE
- Saves the new label. If save is not selected before leaving the label programming section, the changes are lost. Programming Descriptions
69
Words Table
[065] Fire Alarm Label
Enter a 28-character Fire Alarm label. Default value = “
FIRE-ZONE

[066] Fail to Arm Event Message
Enter a 32-character Fail to Arm Event Message. Default value = “
SYSTEM HAS ------
”, “
FAILED-TO-ARM---

Item
#
Text
Item
#
Text
Item
#
Text
Item
#
Text
Item
#
Text
Item
#
Text
001 Aborted
042 Control
083 Garage
124 Motion
165 Shop
206 E
002 AC
043 Date
084 Gas
125 No
166 Side
207 F
003 Access
044 Daughter’s
085 Glass
126 North
167 Siren
208 G
004 Active
045 Degrees
086 Goodbye
127 Not
168 Sliding
209 H
005 Activity
046 Delay
087 Gym
128 Now
169 Smoke
210 I
006 Alarm
047 Den
088 Hallway
129 Number
170 Son’s
211 J
007 All
048 Desk
089 Heat
130 Off
171 Sound
212 K
008 AM
049 Detector
090 Hello
131 Office
172 South
213 L
009 Area
050 Dining
091 Help
132 OK 173 Special
214 M
010 Arm
051 Disarmed
092 High
133 On
174 Stairs
215 N
011 Armed
052 Door
093 Home
134 Open
175 Stay
216 O
012 Arming
053 Down
094 House
135 Opening
176 Sun
217 P
013 Attic
054 Download
095 In
136 Panic
177 Supervisory
218 Q
014 Auxiliary
055 Downstairs
096 Install
137 Partition
178 System
219 R
015 Away
056 Drawer
097 Interior
138 Patio
179 Tamper
220 S
016 Baby
057 Driveway
098 Intrusion
139 Pet
180 Temperature
221 T
017 Back
058 Duct
099 Invalid
140 Phone
181 Test
222 U
018 Bar
059 Duress
100 Is
141 Please
182 Time
223 V
019 Basement
060 East
101 Key
142 PM
183 To
224 W
020 Bathroom
061 Energy Saver
102 Kids
143 Police
184 Touchpad
225 X
021 Battery
062 Enter
103 Kitchen
144 Pool
185 Trouble
226 Y
022 Bedroom
063 Entry
104 Latchkey
145 Porch
186 Unbypass
227 Z
023 Bonus
064 Error
105 Laundry
146 Power
187 Unit
228 (Space)
024 Bottom
065 Exercise
106 Left
147 Press
188 Up
229 ’ (Apostrophe)
025 Breezeway
066 Exit
107 Level
148 Program
189 West
230 - (Dash)
026 Building
067 Exterior
108 Library
149 Progress
190 Window
231 _ (Underscore)
027 Bus
068 Factory
109 Light
150 Quiet
191 Zone
232 *
028 Bypass
069 Failure
110 Lights
151 Rear
192 0
233 #
029 Bypassed
070 Family
111 Living
152 Receiver
193 1
234 :
030 Cabinet
071 Father’s
112 Load
153 Report
194 2
235 /
031 Canceled
072 Feature
113 Loading
154 RF
195 3
236 ?
032 Car
073 Fence
114 Low
155 Right
196 4
033 Carbon
074 Fire
115 Lower
156 Room
197 5
034 Central
075 First
116 Main
157 Safe
198 6
035 Chime
076 Floor
117 Master
158 Schedule
199 7
036 Closed
077 Force
118 Mat
159 Screen
200 8
037 Closet
078 Foyer
119 Medical
160 Second
201 9
038 Closing
079 Freeze
120 Memory
161 Sensor
202 A
039 Code
080 Front
121 Menu
162 Service
203 B
040 Communicator 081 Furnace
122 Monoxide
163 Shed
204 C
041 Computer
082 Gallery
123 Mother’s
164 Shock
205 D SCW9055/9057 Wireless Alarm System
70
[067] Alarm When Armed Event Message
Enter a 32-character Alarm when Armed Event Message. Default value = “
ALARM-OCCURRED--
”, “
WHILE-ARMED---

[074] First Keypad Options
[075] Second Keypad Options
Option Description
[1]
ON:
[F] Key Enabled. Pressing and holding the Fire key for 2 seconds sends a fire key alarm request to the panel. The key-
pad displays “Hold Keys Down for Fire Alarm.”
OFF:
[F] Key Disabled. Pressing the Fire key does not send an alarm or change the keypad's display.
[2]
ON:
[A] Key Enabled. When the [A] key is pressed and held, the keypad generates an [A]ux key alarm. The display prompts
the user to hold the key.
OFF:
[A] Key Disabled. Prevents the keypad from requesting an [A]ux key alarm.
[3]
ON:
[P] Key Enabled. When the [P] key is pressed and held, the keypad generates a [P]anic key alarm. The display prompts
the user to hold the key, depending on the setting of Option 8 (in this section).
OFF:
[P] Key Disabled. Prevents the keypad from requesting a [P]anic key alarm.
[4]
ON:
Quick Arm Prompt ON. When in the Disarmed Star menu, the
Quick Arm
prompt is displayed.
OFF:
Quick Arm Prompt OFF. The
Quick Arm
prompt is disabled.
[5]
ON:
Quick Exit Prompt ON. When in the Armed Star menu, the
Quick Exit
prompt is displayed.
OFF:
Quick Exit Prompt OFF. The
Quick Exit
prompt is disabled.
[6]
ON:
Bypass Options Prompt ON. In the [*1] Bypass menu, the
Bypass Options
prompt is displayed. This is a local function
prompt. When selected, the keypad displays the Bypass Options menu.
OFF:
Bypass Options Prompt and menu OFF. Prompt and menu is disabled.
[7]
ON:
User Initiated Call-Up Prompt ON. In the [*6] User Functions menu, the User Initiated Call-up prompt is Displayed.
When this prompt is selected, the keypad sends a [6] key.
OFF:
User Initiated Call-Up Prompt OFF. The prompt is not displayed.
[8]
ON:
Hold [P]anic Key Prompt ON. When holding the [P] key, the display prompts the user to hold the [P] key to generate a
Panic alarm. This is a local prompt.
OFF:
Hold [P] Key Prompt OFF. When holding the [P] key, the user receives no feedback that the key has been pressed. The
display and backlighting does not change.
Option Description
[1]
ON:
Local Clock Display Enabled: When the keypad is not being used, the keypad returns to displaying the Time and Date
until another key is pressed.
OFF:
Local Clock Display Disabled. Time and date is not displayed on the keypad.
[2]
ON:
Local Clock Displays 24 Hour Time. When this feature is enabled, the time is displayed in 24 hour military format.
OFF:
Local Clock Displays AM/PM Time. When this feature is enabled, the time is displayed in 12 hour format (AM/PM).
This option does not affect the time programming menu, which is always in 24-hour time format.
[3]
ON:
Auto Alarm Scroll Enabled. When the bell is active or when there is an alarm in memory while armed, the keypad
scrolls automatically and displays all alarms.
OFF:
Auto Alarm Scroll Disabled. The keypad does not scroll automatically and display all alarms.
[4]
ON:
Language Selection Accessible from Any Menu. Pressing and holding [] for 2 seconds displays the language
selection menu.
OFF:
Language Selection Accessible from Installer Menu Only. Pressing and holding [] for 2 seconds generates an
error tone.
[5]
ON:
Power LED Enabled. The LED functionality is defined by Option 6.
OFF:
Power LED Disabled. Option 6 has no effect.
[6]
ON: Power LED Indicates AC Present. The LED is ON to indicate AC power is present. If AC is absent, the LED is OFF.
OFF:
Power LED Indicates AC Absent. The LED is ON to indicate AC power is absent. If AC is present, the LED is OFF.
[7]
ON:
Alarms are Displayed while Armed. If any alarms occur while armed, the keypad displays the alarms by identifying the
zones.
OFF:
Alarms are Not Displayed while Armed. If any alarms occur while armed, the keypad does not show any indication
that an alarm occurred on the system. When the system is disarmed, the keypad still enters Alarm Memory to indicate which
zones went into alarm during the alarm period.
[8]
ON:
Auto Scroll Open Zones Enabled. When a zone is open, the keypad scrolls automatically and display all open zones.
Open zones also override the local clock display.
OFF:
Auto Scroll Open Zones Disabled. Open zones are not displayed. Programming Descriptions
71
[076] Third Keypad Options
[077] Programmed LCD Message
Enter a 32-character message. If any characters other than blanks are programmed into this section, the keypad times out to this mes-
sage instead of the Time and Date display. Any option or feature that overrides the clock display also override the LCD message
. An
override by the system is not counted against the Message Duration programmed in Section [078]. This message can be programmed
in
Installer Programming or using DLS.
[078] Programmed LCD Message Duration
This section is used to program the number of times an LCD message must be cleared from the LCD displays (by pressing any key)
before it is no longer displayed. When programmed on the system, the LCD keypad displays the message when not in use. Program-
ming 000 in this section results in the message never clearing. This could be used as a greeting (residential) or a company message
(commercial). This overrides the settings of Clock Display options in Section [075].
Valid Entries are 001 to 255 seconds. 000 = Unlimited Duration.
[100] CO Detector Alarm Label
Use this section to program a custom label for the CO Detector zone. This label is displayed on the keypad during CO detector zone
alarms. The CO Detector Alarm label can be 14x2 characters in length. Default message is CO_Alarm_Evacuate_Area.
[101] System Label
Use this section to program a custom label for the system. This label is a used on various displays to refer to the alarm syste
m. The
default label is “System.” The system label can be up to 14x2 characters in length.
[120]-[121] Command Output Labels
Use these sections to program custom command output labels. These labels are used by the system to display output use and outpu
t acti-
vation events in the event buffer. Command output labels can be 14x2 characters in length.
[996] Label Default
This section resets programmable labels to factory defaults. Entering this section and pressing [

] returns all programmable system
labels to default conditions in the currently active language. Keypad configuration sections are not affected.
[997] Keypad Version
Entering this section displays the keypad version. The keypad version is displayed as a 4-digit decimal entry.
E.g., Entry is 1234 = Version 12.34. This is a read-only value.
[998] Initiate Global Label Broadcast
Programmed keypad labels are broadcast and installed on all system keypads from keypad 1.
Enter [

][998] to broadcast the labels programmed in sections [

][001]-[069] and [

][100]-[125]. This function is also required for
broadcasting labels downloaded using DLS software.
[999] Reset All Keypad Programming to Factory Defaults
Resets all keypad programming to the factory defaults. This un-enrolls the keypad from the system.
Option Description
[1]-[4] Future Use
[5]
ON:
Late to Open Prompts Enabled. The
“Late to Open”
enable/disable prompts in [

][6] user functions are available in the
menu.
OFF:
Late to Open Prompts Disabled. The
“Late to Open”
enable/disable prompts are not available.
[6]-[8] Future Use
i
Initiate this function from the SCW9055/57 main unit. Program all labels manually on the SCW9055/57 first and then
broadcast to WT5500 keypad. SCW9055/9057 Wireless Alarm System
72
Testing & Troubleshooting
Testing:
• Power up system
• Program options as required (see
programming section
)
• Violate, then restore zones
• Verify correct
Reporting Codes
are sent to the central station
Troubleshooting:
• Power up system
• Enter [

][2] to view
Troubles
• Perform actions indicated in the tables below
Trouble Summary:
Trouble [1] Service Required - Press [1] or

for more information:
Low Battery
General System Trouble
General System Tamper
Trouble [2] - AC Trouble
Trouble [3] - Telephone Line Trouble
Trouble [4] - Failure to Communicate
Trouble [5] - Zone Fault -Press [5] or

for more information
Trouble [6] - Zone Tamper - Press [6] or

for more information
Trouble [7] - Wireless Device Low Battery - Press [7] or

for more information
Trouble [8] - Loss of Time or Date - Press

to program date and time
Trouble
Cause
Troubleshooting
Trouble [0] Alternate Communicator Trouble Press [] to determine specific trouble
Alternate Comm SIM Lock
The SIM lock feature has been enabled
and the unit has not been programmed
with the correct PIN for the SIM card.
• Refer to the Communicator installation manual for more
details.
Alternate Comm Cellular
Trouble
This condition is created when the alter-
nate communicator has detected a radio
or SIM failure, a cellular network trou-
ble, or insufficient signal strength.
• Refer to the Communicator installation manual for more
details.
Alternate Comm Ethernet
Trouble
This condition is created when the alter-
nate communicator has detected a net-
work absent condition.
• Refer to the Communicator installation manual for more
details.
Alternate Comm Receiver
Trouble
This condition is generated when the
alternate communicator loses supervision
or fails to initialize a receiver.
• Refer to the Communicator installation manual for more
details.
Alternate Comm Supervi-
sion
This condition is created when the panel
loses communication with an Ethernet or
cellular receiver on the system.
• Refer to the Communicator installation manual for more
details.
Alternate Comm Config
SMS Trouble
This condition is created when the alter-
nate communicator detects an SMS Con-
nect 24 Configuration SMS failure
trouble.
• Refer to the Communicator installation manual for more
details.
Alternate Comm Fault
This condition is created by the
SCW9055/57 when the alternate commu-
nicator has not responded to any poll
commands. Alternate Comm Fault is dis-
played in [*][2] and the event buffer. The
reporting code for this trouble is General
System Supervisory.
• Refer to the Communicator installation manual for more
details. Testing & Troubleshooting
73
Trouble [1] Service Required Press [1] to determine specific trouble
Low Battery
The panel detects that no battery is pres-
ent, that the battery is shorted, or that the
battery is below the low battery threshold
(less than 7.2V
DC).
NOTE:
This trouble condition will clear
once the panel determines that the low
battery restore threshold (7.6 VDC) has
been reached.
NOTE: If battery is new, allow 24 Hrs. to charge.
• Verify voltage measured across AC terminals is 16-18 VAC.
• Verify voltage measured across battery terminals is 12.5V +/-
0.1V.
• Replace transformer if required.
• Disconnect then reconnect battery leads.
• If Low Battery Trouble LED is still on after 10 minutes,
replace battery.
General System Trouble
Communications with the wireless
receiver have failed causing a Hardware
fault, an Aux Supply Trouble is present
or the LCD display is not functioning.
• Check event buffer to determine specific trouble.
• If buffer logs “Hardware Fault” or “LCD Loss” replace
panel.
• If necessary, test AC outlet for loss of power and remedy.
General System Tamper
Cover tamper tripped.
• Verify that tamper button is installed into backplate.
• Verify that keypad (cover) is secured to backplate.
RF Jam
The system has detected the presence of
an RF jam for 20 seconds or communica-
tions with the wireless receiver have
failed causing a Hardware fault. An RF
jam may also be detected by a wireless
repeater.
The Trouble light on the alarm panel
glows orange to indicate RF jam.
• Check Event buffer to determine specific trouble.
• If Buffer logs RF Jam trouble, check for external 433MHZ
signal sources. To disable RF Jam: enable Option [7] in pro-
gram section [804] subsection [90].
• If Buffer logs Hardware fault - replace panel.
Trouble [2] AC Failure
AC Failure
No AC at panel AC input terminals,
enrolled WS4920/8920 repeater has
experienced loss of AC power.
• Verify voltage measured across AC terminals is 16-
18VAC. Replace transformer if required.
• If buffer logs “Repeater AC Loss”, inspect repeater for
cause (power supply unplugged from AC outlet, power sup-
ply wires loose or disconnected.
Trouble [3] Telephone Line Trouble
Telephone Line Trouble
Phone line voltage at TIP, RING on main
panel is less than 3V
DC.
Measure the voltage across TIP and RING on the panel:
• No phone off-hook – 50VDC (approx.).
• Any phone off-hook – 5VDC (approx.).
Wire incoming line directly to TIP and RING.
• If trouble clears, check wiring or the RJ-31x phone jack.
Trouble [4] Failure to Communicate
Failure to Communicate
Panel fails to communicate one or more
events to central station.
Connect a headset to TIP and RING of the control panel.
Monitor for the following conditions:
Continuous dial tone

• Reverse TIP and RING.
Recorded operator message comes on

• Verify correct phone number is programmed.
• Dial the number programmed using a regular telephone to
determine if a [9] must be dialed or if 800 service is
blocked.
Panel does not respond to handshakes
• Verify the format programmed is supported by the central
station.
Panel transmits data multiple times without receiving a
handshake
• Verify that the account number and reporting codes are cor-
rectly programmed.
Contact ID and Pulse formats

• Program a HEX [A] to transmit a digit [0].
SIA format

• Program a digit [0] to transmit a digit [0].
Alternate Communicator
• Refer to the Communicator installation manual for trouble-
shooting actions. SCW9055/9057 Wireless Alarm System
74
Trouble [5] Zone Fault
Press [5] to determine specific zones with a Fault trouble
1
st
press - Zone faults
2
nd
press - Keypad faults
3
rd
press - Siren faults
4
th
press - Repeater fault
5
th
press - RF fault
Hard-wired zone fault condition present.
A short circuit is present on one or more
zones with double end-of-line resistors
enabled.
• Remove the wire leads from I/O and COM terminals and
measure the resistance of the wire leads.
• Connect a 5.6K resistor (Green, Blue, Red) across the I/O
and COM terminals. Verify the trouble condition clears.
One or more wireless devices have not
checked in within the programmed time.
• Perform a Module Placement Test – program section [904]
and verify the wireless device is in a good location.
• If bad test results occur, test the wireless device in
another location. If the wireless device now tests
good, the original mounting location is bad.
• If the wireless device continues to give bad test
results, replace the wireless device.
Trouble [6] Zone Tamper Press [6] to determine specific zones with a Tamper trouble
1
st
Press - Zone faults
2
nd
press - Keypad faults
3
rd
press - Siren faults
4
th
press - Repeater fault
An open circuit is present on one or more
zones with double end-of-line resistors
enabled.
• Remove the wire leads from I/O and COM terminals and
measure the resistance of the wire leads.
• Connect a 5.6K resistor (Green, Blue, Red) across the I/O
and COM terminals.
• Verify the trouble condition clears.
A tamper condition is present on one or
more wireless devices.
• Ensure device cover is secure.
• Ensure device is correctly mounted for wall tamper opera-
tion.
• Violate, then restore the tamper. If tamper condition per-
sists, replace wireless device.
Trouble [7] Wireless Device Low Battery Press [7] to scroll through specific devices with a Low Bat-
tery Trouble
1
st
press - Wireless Zones
2
nd
press - Wireless Keys
3
rd
press - Wireless Keypads
4
th
press - Wireless Sirens
5
th
press - Wireless Proximity
Tags
6
th
press - Repeater
One or more wireless devices has a low
battery.
NOTE: The event is not logged to the
event buffer until the wireless device low
battery delay time expires.
Program section [377] Opt 9.
Replace Battery
• Verify zone operation.
• Verify that tamper and low battery condition is cleared and
reported.
• Flashing Trouble LED on keypad indicates low battery. To
determine which indoor siren is in low battery, press the
Test button. If no test indications are sounded, replace bat-
teries.
• To determine which outdoor siren is in low battery, remove
and reconnect battery. If strobe does not flash, replace bat-
tery.
• If a proximity tag is in low battery, the tag must be deleted
and replaced before the trouble is cleared from [*][2].
NOTE:
Replacing batteries causes a tamper. Replacing cover
restores the tamper and sends the associated report-
ing codes to the central station.
Trouble [8] Loss of Clock/Date
Loss of time and date
The main panel internal clock is not set.
To program the time and date:
• Enter [

][6][Master Code] then Press [1].
• Enter the time and date (in military) using the following
format: HH:MM MM/DD/YY
Example.
For 6:00 pm, Nov. 30, 2007
Enter: [18] [00] [11] [30] [07] Alarm.com HSPA3G/CDMA
75
Alarm.com HSPA3G/CDMA
This chapter describes the Alarm.com modules used with the SCW9055/57 models.
Introduction to the Alarm.com Modules
The following introductory sections identify the Alarm.com modules and offer a brief overview as to their capabilities.
NOTE:
Both the HSPA3G module and the CDMA module are available in the following models:
Table 8-1 Alarm.com Communicator Models
HSPA 3G Module (3G8055)/(I)
The HSPA module enables wireless reporting of all alarms and other system events from the DSC Impassa control panel using an all-
digital, HSPA wireless (cellular) network. The module can be used as the primary communication path for all alarm signaling, or as a
backup to a telephone connection to the central monitoring station. The wireless alarm signaling and routing service is operated by
Alarm.com. The HSPA module also features integrated support for Alarm.com’s home automation

solution with built-in Z-Wave capa-
bilities.
CDMA Module (CD8055)/(I)
The CDMA module for Impassa enables wireless reporting of all alarms and other system events from the DSC Impassa control panel
using an all-digital, CDMA wireless (cellular) network. The module can be used as the primary communication path for all alarm sig-
naling, or as a backup to a telephone connection to the central monitoring station. The wireless alarm signaling and routing service is
operated by Alarm.com. The CDMA module also features integrated support for Alarm.com’s home automation solution with built-in
Z-Wave capabilities.
NOTE:
Alarm.com’s home automation solution with built-in Z-Wave capabilities is not UL/ULC evaluated.
Contact Information
For additional information and support on Alarm.com modules, initial account setup, home automation, and all other Alarm.com prod-
ucts and services, please visit: www.Alarm.com/dealer or contact Alarm.com technical support at: 1-866-834-0470.
Compatibility
The HSPA/CDMA module is compatible with DSC Impassa panels: SCW9055G-433 and SCW9057G-433. Note that the 9055 version
does not support two-way voice communication.
Installation
Follow these guidelines during installation:
• Before affixing the panel to a wall, verify the HSPA/CDMA signal level at the installation location. On the Impassa panel, press and
hold the 5 key for 2 seconds to view the HSPA/CDMA signal level. An installation location with a sustained signal level of two or
more bars is recommended.
• Do not exceed the panel total output power when using panel power for the HSPA/CDMA module, hardwired sensors, and /or sirens.

Refer to the specific panel installation instructions for details. Only one Alarm.com HSPA/CDMA module can be used per Impassa
panel.
• The HSPA/CDMA module draws on average 100 mA during normal operation. In PowerSave mode, during or immediately following
an AC power failure, the module will draw only 5mA on average (10mA with an image sensor daughterboard).
• To minimize potential interference with cellular signaling, avoid mounting the panel in areas with excessive metal or electric
al wiring,
such as furnaces or utility rooms.
UL/ULC INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
• For ULC Residential fire and burglary applications, the 3G2055/TL2553G, 3G8055(I), CD8055(I) can be used as a primary commu-
nication channel via Cellular, or as a back-up in conjunction with the Digital Alarm Communicator Transmitter (DACT). Test trans-
mission every 24 hours is enabled on each channel.
• For UL Residential fire and burglary applications, the 3G2055/TL2553G, 3G8055(I), CD8055(I) can be used as primary communica-
tion channel via Cellular, or as a back-up in conjunction with the DACT. (30 day test transmission is required on each channel).
Module
Model
HSPA3G
3G8055
3G8055(I)*
CDMA
CD8055
CD8055(I)*
* Image Sensor
Compatible SCW9055/57 Wireless Alarm System
76
Figure 8-1Front View of Impassa Panel
Non Pre-installed Panel Module Installation Steps
If the panel came with the module pre-installed then only an HSPA/CDMA phone test is required. Otherwise, installation includes the
following steps:
1.
The module compartment can be found behind the front panel that swings down, to the right of the battery compartment as seen
in
the following figure.
Figure 8-2 Module Compartment for Impassa Panels
2.
Push antenna end into module connector to snap the antenna onto the module.
3.
Insert the module by angling the end of the module where the antenna is attached downwards, making sure that the edge of the
module sits below the plastic tabs located at the top of the panel (see previous figure). Push the other end of the module down-
wards, until it sits below the plastic tab located at the bottom of the panel.
4.
Place the antenna in the slotted space above the module.
5.
Connect the module to the panel via the 16 pin ribbon cable. The ribbon connector is located at the top of the module, near the
antenna. On the panel, the ribbon connector is located directly across from the connector on the module.
Power Up
Connect panel battery and AC power. Once an HSPA/CDMA module is connected to a powered control panel, view key items on the
LCD. Ensure that the module has been fully connected to the panel via the ribbon cable and then perform a full power cycle by f
ollow-
ing these steps:
1.
Disconnect the battery leads and unplug the panel power transformer from AC power.
2.
Verify that the module is inserted securely and that the antenna is snapped-in completely.
3.
Connect battery leads to the battery.
4.
Plug the panel power transformer into the AC outlet.
It is important to plug the battery in before closing the Impassa, otherwise the panel will issue a “System Low Battery” messag
e regard-
less of the battery voltage level.
NOTE:
Power cycling will clear existing banners.
Insert screwdriver in slots indicated.
Gently pry open cover with screwdriver
until cover separates.
Remove cover screw
Wiring Access
Case Tamper Switch
Communicator
Module
Telephone Line
12 V
DC
PGM/Zones
AC Po we r
Red Grn Gr
a Br n
AC AC
Aux
1 I/O 2
+-
Ring
Tip R- 1
T-1
SCW 9055/57 ( G, I, D Models)
Mounting Holes (4)
Battery
Surface Mount
Wiring Access
Cover Screw Hole Alarm.com HSPA3G/CDMA
77
Enroll Alarm.com Image Sensor
1.
Ensure batteries are removed from the sensor.
2.
On the panel, enter the Interactive Services menu. Interactive Services can be accessed, via section [851] of Installer Program-
ming.
3.
Press [

][8] [Installer Code] [851].
4.
Scroll to Image Sensor Setup and press [

].
5.
Scroll to Learn Image Sensor and press [

]. The will display “Power up or reset I.S. now.”
6.
Insert the batteries into the sensor. Wait approximately 20 seconds for the control panel screen to display: “I.S. [x] Added as Sen-
sor [y].” The LED on the sensor will turn solid for 5 seconds, once the sensor has enrolled.
7.
Perform another panel comm-test to ensure that Alarm.com receives the updated device equipment list. This will speed up the s
en-
sor initialization process.
• The zone serial number will be programmed automatically as FFFFXX into the next available slot in section [804][001]-[064] to
indi-
cate the zone is an image sensor. The last 2 digits XX are used to map the image sensor number and the range is 01-FF. For example,
zone slot 12 is programmed with serial number FFFF03. This means image sensor 3 is assigned to actual zone slot 12.
• Zone type and attribute can be assigned in the installer menu, in a similar way as other regular zones.
HSPA/CDMA Phone Test (Module Registration)
To initiate module communication with Alarm.com and the HSPA/CDMA network for the first time, perform an “HSPA/CDMA phone
test”. Note that the phone test can also be used at any time by the installer to force communication with Alarm.com. A phone test can
also be completed through the Interactive Services menu. Perform a phone test by pressing and holding [3] for two seconds. To p
erform
the phone test on an Impassa press [

][6] followed by the master code and [4].
The Impassa panel indicates when the HSPA/CDMA phone test has completed by activating the siren output on medium volume for 2
seconds followed by full volume for 2 seconds. However, if the phone test was initiated via the [3] key, or through the Interactive Ser-
vices menu, the siren will not sound. All display lights and LCD pixels turn on. This indicates that Alarm.com has received and
acknowledged the signal. This does not guarantee that the signal went through to a central station; it confirms that Alarm.com’s Net-
work Operations Center received the signal. The central station should be contacted directly to verify that the signal was rece
ived on the
correct account and that the central station routing settings have been set up correctly. If the signal does not go through to the Central
Station, the panel will display a “Failure to Communicate” message. Double check the account’s Central Station Forwarding Settings
on Alarm.com and contact technical support if the trouble persists.
Panel Settings
Night Arming
The Impassa panel has the ability to night arm, which arms the perimeter and restricts movement to designated interior areas. Night
arming via the panel should be restricted to one of the five function keys. For more information on Night Arming and how to program
the function keys, see the installation guide provided with the panel.
Central Station and Telephone Line Settings
Central Station and telephone line settings will be automatically configured through the CS Forwarding Settings page of the Dealer
Site. The following are the panel settings that will be configured via the Dealer Site page and should not be configured in the panel:
Table 8-2 Panel Settings
Section
Option
Description
015
7
Telephone line monitoring
301
--
Communication telephone numbers
302
--
Communication telephone numbers
303
--
Communication telephone numbers
305
--
Communication telephone numbers
310
--
System account umber
350
1st Telephone Number
Communicator format options
350
2nd Telephone Number
Communicator format options
381
3
Reporting codes
381
7
Reporting codes
383
2
Telephone number backup options
383
8
Remote notification format SCW9055/9057 Wireless Alarm System
78
Two-Way Voice
Section [600] option [8] controls how the CS operator initiates the 2-way audio session. Set to ON for the session to be initia
ted by the
operator. Set to OFF for the session to begin immediately after the siren turns off.
Zone Attributes
Sections [101] through [164] control the attributes for each zone. Option [5] enables or disables Force Arming. If this option is set to
OFF, the system cannot be armed if the zone is opened.
Notifications
The following panel settings may alter the behavior of customer notifications:
Table 8-3 Panel Settings
Not Supported
The following panel settings are either handled automatically or not supported and so any changes to them will be ignored:
Table 8-4 Panel Settings
Panel Settings Automatically Change
Some panel settings are changed automatically when the HSPA/CDMA module is connected to the control panel. These settings shoul
d
not be altered. They are:
Table 8-5 Automatically Changed Panel Settings
Section
Option
Description
015
4
If this option is ON, keyfob arming notifications will not be associ-
ated with a specific user
015
8
If this option is OFF, notifications will not be available for panel tam-
pers. Set to ON to enable tamper notifications
Section(s)
Option(s)
Description
324-348
All
Custom reporting codes
377
Swinger Shutdown
(Tampers and Rest)
Max. number of transmissions
377
Swinger Shutdown
(Maint. And Rest)
Max. number of transmissions
600
1-7
2-way Audio control
601
All
2-way Audio control
609-611
All
Reporting codes
Sec-
tion
Option
Value
Description
015
6
OFF
Master code is not changeable and must be OFF to ensure the
module communicates the correct master code
016
8
OFF
Daylights saving time must be disabled to ensure panel time is
accurate
024
5
OFF
Realtime clock must be disabled to ensure panel time is accurate
377
AC Failure Communi-
cation Delay
Random value between
001 and 030
AC Failure Communication Delay should be set between 001 and
030 to ensure notifications for power failures are received
377
Wireless Device Low
Battery Transmission
Delay
001
Wireless Device Low Battery Transmission Delay should be set to
001 to ensure notifications for low batteries are received
380
1
ON
Communications must be enabled so the module can communicate
with the panel
380
2
OFF
System should transmit alarm restores immediately when the zone
is restored
382
5
ON
Communications must be enabled so the module can communicate
with the panel
382
6
OFF
AC Failure Transmission Delay should be in minutes
701
5
OFF
User Access Codes must be 4-digits Alarm.com HSPA3G/CDMA
79
Clock:
The HSPA/CDMA module sets the panel clock when it connects to Alarm.com and then updates it every 18 hours. It is import-
ant to select the correct panel time zone on the Alarm.com website, or the panel time will not be accurate. If a system is powered up
before the customer account has been created, the time zone will default to Eastern Standard Time.
Troubleshooting: Module Status Information
Module status information for verifying and troubleshooting the module connection status or errors can be found through the Int
eractive
Services menus on the Impassa. To access these,
press [

][8][Installer Code][851].
See the following table for potential module states.
Table 8-6 HSPA/CDMA Module Statuses
In addition, some of the information can be retrieved via long key presses from the keypad. Press and hold the following panel
keys for
2 seconds to display the given information on the panel display. Most messages are displayed for less than 30 seconds but can be cut
short by pressing the 0 Key for 2 seconds.
Table 8-7 HSPA/CDMA Module Statuses
Improving Wireless Signal Strength
As you make changes to the module location to improve signal strength, request updated signal readings to verify changes. To request
an updated reading, press and hold the “5” key for 2 seconds.
Guidelines for optimal wireless signal strength:
• Install the module above ground level, as high up as possible within the structure.
• Install the module near or adjacent to an exterior-facing wall of the structure.
• Do not install the module inside a metal structure or close to large metal objects or ducts.
• Upgrade the antenna. Contact DSC technical support for antenna options.
Installer Programming
Table 8-8 Installer Programming
Idle
Most common state. Module is not actively sending data and no errors are present
Roaming
Roaming on partner network
SIM Missing
The SIM card is missing. Not applicable to CDMA
PowerSave
Mode
AC power is down
Registering...
The module is trying to register on the HSPA/CDMA network
Connection
Error
The module is registered on the HSPA/CDMA network but cannot connect with Alarm.com. Contact Alarm.com
technical support for more information
Radio Error
Radio portion of the module is not operating correctly. Power cycle the panel and call Alarm.com technical support
if the trouble persists
Server Error
Identifies a server error. If it persists, the account may have been set up incorrectly
Connected
Currently connected and transmitting information to the Alarm.com servers
Connecting...
In the process of connecting to Alarm.com
Updating...
Updating signal level
1 key
10-digit module serial number. This number is needed to create the Alarm.com customer account
2 key
Module firmware version. (e.g., 181a)
3 key
Initiate communication test.
Important
: This is a required test to correctly complete the installation
5 key
Wireless signal strength level and module status or error, if any. The panel will display the signal level in bars (0
to 5) and as a numerical value (0 to 31) followed by the connection mode (HSPA/CDMA). (See “HSPA
/CDMA

Module Statuses” in Table 2)
6 key
Battery voltage as read by the module, to two decimal places, and the AC power status. (e.g., Battery: 6.79v, AC
Power OK)
8 key
HSPA/CDMA frequency used by the module: "High" = 1900MHz,
2100MHz; "Low" = 850 MHz. The panel will specify either “3G” or “2G” depending on your coverage, but will
always attempt to go to 3G coverage.
Menu
Description
Installer Programming
Press [

][8] [Installer Code] [851] to enter Interactive Services menu
--HSPA
/
CDMA

Module Status
Scroll down through the various HSPA
/
CDMA module information screens SCW9055/9057 Wireless Alarm System
80
---Radio
Signal level, connection status, roaming status, and errors (if any)
---HSPA
/
CDMA Freq.
HSPA
/
CDMA frequency used by the module
---SN
Module serial number. Needed to create or troubleshoot an Alarm.com account
---SIM Card
SIM card number. Sometimes needed to troubleshoot an account. Not applicable to CDMA radios
---Version
HSPA
/
CDMA module firmware version and sub-version. Example: 181a; 181 = module firmware
version, a = subversion
---Advanced - Network
For Alarm.com use only
--Z-Wave Setup
2
This menu is used to add, remove, and troubleshoot Z-Wave devices and networks. To control Z-
Wave devices via the Alarm.com website and smart phone apps, you will also need to enable Z-
Wave services on the account
--Number of Z-Wave Devices2
The total number of Z-Wave devices currently known to the HSPA module
---Add Z-Wave Device
2
Press [

] to enter Z-Wave Add Mode. Make sure the device being added is powered up and
within 3 to 6 feet of the Impassa panel. Refer to the manufacturer’s instructions for button presses
required to enroll devices
---Remove Z-Wave Device
2
Press [

] to remove an existing Z-Wave device, or to “reset” a Z-Wave device that was previously
learned into a different Z-Wave network. Previously enrolled devices must be reset before they
can be enrolled into the module
---Z-Wave Home ID
2
Press [

] to query the Z-Wave network Home ID. If the ID is 0, verify that the module has commu-
nicated with Alarm.com and that the Alarm.com account is set up for Z-Wave.
---Image Sensor Setup
1
An image sensor daughterboard is required to enable image sensor capabilities on the module.
This menu is only active if an image sensor daughterboard is connected
---Learn Image Sensor
1
Press [

] to enter Add Mode. Enroll the image sensor by inserting batteries or resetting
---Delete Image Sensor
1
Press [

] and scroll to the image sensor to delete. Press [

] to delete
---Image Sensor Settings
1
Press [

] and scroll to the image sensor of interest. Press [

]
----Image Sensor #[x]
1
[x] is the sensor ID. Press [

] to view information on this image sensor.
-----[Power Information]
1
Gives information on the image sensor’s battery level and power status
-----Signal
1
Signal strength of the communication between image sensor and image sensor daughterboard
-----Test PIR
1
Press [

] to put the image sensor in PIR Test Mode
-----PIR Sensitivity
1
Press [

] to view current selection. Scroll down to view sensitivity levels. Press [

] to select
-----Rules
1
Displays whether rules are confirmed
-----MAC
1
MAC address of image sensor
-----Version
1
Image sensor daughterboard version
-----Last Talk
1
Last image sensor talk time
---Extended Range Option
Press [

] to enable/disable extended range
---Communications Test
Press [

] to perform ADC communication test
User Functions
Press [

] [6] [Master Access Code] to enter User Functions menu. Then scroll to Interac-
tive Services
--HSPA/CDMA Module Status
See Installer Programming section
---Radio
See Installer Programming section
---HSPA/CDMA Freq.
See Installer Programming section
--SN
See Installer Programming section
---SIM card
See Installer Programming section
---Version
See Installer Programming section
---Advanced - Network
See Installer Programming section
--Z-Wave Setup
2
See Installer Programming section Alarm.com HSPA3G/CDMA
81
1
All Image Sensor menus are only available when an image sensor daughterboard has been connected to the module. An image sensor

daughterboard is required to enable image sensor functionality. An interactive Alarm.com account with an image sensor service p
lan is
required for image capabilities and features.
2
Refer to the Home Automation installation instructions and guides on the Alarm.com
Dealer Site for more information on Z-Wave enrollment and troubleshooting.
Specifications
Table 8-9 Specifications
Regulatory Information
NOTE:
For UL/ULC applications, the temperature rating is 0-49
o
C and the maximum relative humidity rating is 85% RH.
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by DSC can void the user’s authority to operate the equipment. This equipment has
been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are
designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates,
uses, and
can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interf
erence to
radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equ
ipment does
cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is
encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:
• Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
• Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
• Connect the equipment in to an outlet on a circuit different from that which the receiver is connected
• Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.
This equipment complies with FCC and Industry standards RF radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment.
This
equipment should be installed and operated with a minimum distance of 20 centimeters between the radiator and your body.
Under Industry Canada regulations, this radio transmitter only operates using an antenna of a type and maximum (or lesser) gain
approved for the transmitter by Industry Canada. To reduce potential radio interference to others, the antenna type and its gain should
be so chosen that the equivalent isotropically radiated power (e.i.r.p.) is not more than that necessary for successful communication.
Conformément à la réglementation d'Industrie Canada, le présent émetteur radio peut fonctionner avec une antenne d'un type et d'un
gain maximal (ou inférieur) approuvé pour l'émetteur par Industrie Canada. Dans le but de réduire les risques de brouillage radioélec-
trique à l'intention des autres utilisateurs, il faut choisir le type d'antenne et son gain de sorte que la puissance isotrope rayonnée équiv-
alente (p.i.r.e.) ne dépasse pas l'intensité nécessaire à l'établissement d'une communication satisfaisante.
This device complies with Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1)
this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause unde-
sired operation of the device. Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR d'Industrie Canada applicables aux appareils radio exem
pts de
licence. L'exploitation est autorisée aux deux conditions suivantes : (1) l'appareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage, et (2)
l'utilisateur de
l'appareil doit accepter tout brouillage radioélectrique subimême si le brouillage est susceptible d'en compromettre le fonctionnement.
---Number of Z-Wave Devices
2
See Installer Programming section
---Add Z-Wave Device
2
See Installer Programming section
---Remove Z-Wave Device
2
See Installer Programming section
---Z-Wave Home ID
2
See Installer Programming section
--Image Sensor Setup
1
See Installer Programming section
---Image Sensor #[x]
1
See Installer Programming section
----[Power Information]
1
See Installer Programming section
----Signal
1
See Installer Programming section
----Test PIR
1
See Installer Programming section
--Communication Test
See Installer Programming section
Compatibility
Impassa panels with software versions 1.3 and later
Operating Temperature
14 to 131
o
F (-10 to 55
o
C)

Storage Temperature
-30 to 140
o
F (-34 to 60
o
C)

Max. relative humidity
90% non-condensing
Cellular Network
HSPA 3G
/CDMA
Dimensions
(H x W) 3.25 x 4.25 in. (8.23 x 10.80 cm) SCW9055/9057 Wireless Alarm System
82
Industry Canada Statement
NOTICE
: This Equipment, SCW9055(D)(I)-433, SCW9057(D)(I)-433 meets the applicable Industry Canada Terminal Equipment
Technical Specifications.This is confirmed by the registration number. The abbreviation, IC, before the registration number signifies
that registration was performed based on a Declaration of Conformity indicating that Industry Canada technical specifications were
met. It does not imply that Industry Canada approved the equipment
NOTICE
: The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) for this terminal equipment is 0.1. The REN assigned to each terminal equipment
provides an indication of the maximum number of terminals allowed to be connected to a telephone interface. The termination on an
interface may consist of any combination of devices subject only to the requirement that the sum of the Ringer Equivalence Numb
ers of
all devices does not exceed five. L’indice d’équivalence de la sonnerie (IES) sert à indiquer le nombre maximal de terminaux qui peu-
vent être raccordés à une interface téléphonique. La terminaison d’une interface peut consister en une combinaison quelconque de dis-
positifs, à la seule condition que la somme d’indices d’équivalence de la sonnerie de tous les dispositifs n’excède pas 5.
Certification Number: IC: 160A-3G255SM
This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003. Cet appareil numérique de la classe B est conforme à la norme N
MB-
003 du Canada.
FCC/IC
This modular transmitter is labeled with its own FCC ID and IC number. When the module is installed inside the host device and the
FCC ID/IC of the module is not visible, the host device shall display the provided label referring to the FCC ID and IC of the
enclosed
module. This label is shipped together with the module and it is the responsibility of the integrator to apply it to the exterior of the
enclosure as displayed in the following figure.
Figure 8-3 FCC/IC Label
For additional information about the modules discussed in this chapter, refer to the Alarm.com web site. Appendix A: Reporting Code Formats
83
Appendix A: Reporting Code Formats
The following tables contain Contact ID and Automatic SIA format reporting codes. See Programming Sections [320]-[348] for Reporting Codes.
Contact ID
The first digit (in parentheses) is automatically sent by the control. The second two digits are programmed to indicate specifi
c information about the sig-
nal. For example, if zone 1 is an entry/exit point, you could program the event code as [34]. The central station would receive the following:
*BURG - ENTRY/EXIT - 1 where the “1” indicates which zone went into alarm.
SIA Format - Level 2 (Hard Coded)
The SIA communication format used in this product follows the level 2 specifications of the SIA Digital Communication Standard - October 1997. This
format will send the Account Code along with its data transmission. The transmission will look similar to the following at the receiver:
N ri1 BA 01
N = New Event
ri1 = Partition /Area Identifier
BA = Burglary Alarm
01 = Zone 1
A system event will use the Area Identifier ri00.
Contact ID Zone Alarm/Restore Event Codes
Section #
Reporting Code
Code Sent When...
Dialer
Direction*
Automatic
Contact ID
Codes
SIA Auto
Rep Codes**
[320]-[323] Zone Alarms
Zone goes into alarm
A/R
See the tables on page 86 for
details
[324]-[327] Zone Restores
Alarm condition has been restored
A/R
[328]
Duress Alarm
Duress code entered at keypad
A/R
E(1)21-000
HA-00
[328]
Opening After Alarm
System disarmed with alarm in memory
A/R
E(4)58-000
OR-00
[328]
Recent Closing
Alarm occurs within two minutes of system arming
A/R
E(4)59-UUU
CR-UU
[328]
Cross Zone (Police Code)
Alarm
Two zones on the same partition go into alarm during
any given armed-to-armed period (incl. 24Hr zones)
A/R
E(1)39-000
BM-00/BV-00
[328]
Burglary Not Verified
This event is transmitted when a second cross zone
alarm does not occur within the cross zoning time
A/R
E(3)78-000
OC-00
[328]
Alarm Canceled
Sent when the system is disarmed after an alarm, but
before the expiry of the alarm cancellation timer
A/R
E(4)A6-UUU
OC-UU
[329]
[F] Key Alarm/Rest.
Keypad fire alarm (alarm and restore rep. codes sent
together)
A/R
E(1)1A-000
R(1)1A-000
FA-00/FH-00
[329]
[A] Key Alarm/Rest.
Keypad auxiliary alarm (alarm and restore rep. codes
sent together)
A/R
E(1)AA-000
R(1)AA-000
MA-00/MH-00
[329]
[P] Key Alarm/Rest.
Keypad panic alarm (alarm and restore rep. codes sent
together)
A/R
E(1)2A-000
R(1)2A-000
PA-00/PH-00
[329]
Fail to Report In
A zone was not tripped between the inactivity monitoring
windows
A/R
E(1)A2-000
NA-00
[330]-[337] Zone Tamper/Restore
Zone is tampered / tamper condition restored
T/R
E(3)83-ZZZ
R(3)83-ZZZ
TA-ZZ/TR-ZZ
[338]
General System Tamper/
Rest. (while armed)
Case/cover has a tamper alarm. Case/cover tamper
restored while armed
T/R
E(1)37-000
R(1)37-000
ES-00/EJ-00
General System Tamper/
Rest. (while disarmed)
Case/cover has a tamper alarm. Case/cover tamper
restored while disarmed
T/R
E(3)17-000
R(3)17-000
ES-00/EJ-00
[338]
Keypad Lockout
Maximum number of incorrect access codes has been
entered at a keypad
T/R
E(4)61-000
JA-00
[339-341]
Closings
System armed (user 01-16, 40 indicated)
O/C
E(4)A1-UUU
CL-UU
[341]
Automatic Zone Bypass
A zone was bypassed at the time of arming
O/C
E(5)7A-ZZZ
UB-ZZ
[341]
Partial Closing
One or more zones bypassed when system armed
O/C
E(4)56-000
CG-00
[341]
Special Closing
Closing (arming) using one of the following methods:
quick arm, keyswitch, function key, maintenance code,
DLS software, wireless key
O/C
E(4)AA-000
CL-00
[341]
Exit Fault
Sent when an exit error occurs and the Entry Delay
expires before the system is disarmed
O/C
E(3)74-ZZZ
EA-ZZ
[342-344]
Openings
System disarmed (user 01-16, 40 indicated)
O/C
E(4)A1-UUU
OP-UU
[344]
Special Opening
Opening (disarming) using one of the following:
keyswitch, maintenance code, DLS software, wireless key
O/C
E(4)AA-000
OP-00
[344]
Late to Open
The system was not disarmed when the late to open time
expired
O/C
E(4)53-000
CT-00
[345]-[346] Battery Trouble/Rest.
SCW System battery is low/battery restored.
MA/R
E(3)A2-000
R(3)A2-000
YT-00/YR-00
[345]-[346] AC Line Trouble/Rest.
AC power to control panel is disconnected /AC power
restored (Both codes follow AC Failure Comm. Delay.)
MA/R
E(3)A1-000
R(3)A1-000
AT-00/AR-00
[345]-[346] Fire Trouble/Rest.
Trouble occurs/restore on a fire zone
MA/R
E(3)73-000
R(3)73-000
FT-00/FH-00
[345]-[346] Auxiliary Power Trouble/
Rest.
Aux voltage supply trouble/restore
MA/R
E(3) 12-000
R(3) 12-000
YP-00/YQ-00 SCW9055/9057 Wireless Alarm System
84
[346]
TLM Fail/Restore
Telephone line restored
MA/R
E(3) 51-000
R(3) 51-000
LT-01/LR-01
[345]-[346] Gen. System Trouble/Rest. Hardware fault, LCD Loss, Repeater AC Loss or RF Jam
trouble has occurred/ been restored.
MA/R
E(3) AA-000
R(3) AA-000
YX-00/YZ-00
[345]-[346] Gen. System Supervisory
Trouble/Rest.
Control panel has detected an alternate communicator
fault/communications restored.
MA/R
E(3) 3A-000
R(3) 3A-000
ET-00/ER/00
[346]
Cold Start
The SCW9055/57 has restarted after total power loss.
MA/R
E(3) A5-000
RR-00
[347]
Phone# 1 to 4 FTC Restore Control panel has restored communications to central
station on Phone# 1 to 4 (after FTC)
MA/R
E(3) 54-000
YK-00
[347]
DLS Lead In
Downloading session start
MA/R
E(4) 11
RB-00
[347]
DLS Lead Out
Downloading session complete
MA/R
E(4) 12
RS-00
[347]
Zone Fault/Rest.
One or more zones have faults/restored
MA/R
E(3) 8A-ZZZ
R(3) 8A-ZZZ
UT-ZZ/UJ-ZZ
[347]
Delinquency
Programmed duration (days or hours) for delinquency has
expired without zone activity or the system being armed
MA/R
E(6) 54-000*** CD-00
[347]
Wireless Zone Low Battery
Trouble/Rest.
Wireless zones have low battery trouble/has been
restored
MA/R
E(3) 84-ZZZ
R(3) 84-ZZZ
XT-ZZ/XR-ZZ
[347]
Wireless Device Low
Battery Trouble/Rest.
Wireless panic pendants and wireless keys have low
battery/all low batteries restored
MA/R
E(3) 84-000
R(3) 84-000
XT-00/XR-00****
[347]
Keypad 1 Low Battery/
Rest.
Keypad 1 has a low battery trouble/has been restored
MA/R
E(3) 84-070
R(3) 84-070
XT-70/XR-70
[347]
Keypad 2 Low Battery/
Rest.
Keypad 2 has a low battery trouble/has been restored
MA/R
E(3) 84-071
R(3) 84-071
XT-71/XR-71
[347]
Keypad 3 Low Battery/
Rest.
Keypad 3 has a low battery trouble/has been restored
MA/R
E(3) 84-072
R(3) 84-072
XT-72/XR-72
[347]
Keypad 4 Low Battery/
Rest.
Keypad 4 has a low battery trouble/has been restored
MA/R
E(3) 84-073
R(3) 84-073
XT-73/XR-73
[347]
Siren 1 Low Battery/Rest. Siren 1 has a low battery trouble/has been restored
MA/R
E(3) 84-080
R(3) 84-080
XT-80/XR-80
[347]
Siren 2 Low Battery/Rest. Siren 2 has a low battery trouble/has been restored
MA/R
E(3) 84-081
R(3) 84-081
XT-81/XR-81
[347]
Siren 3 Low Battery/Rest. Siren 3 has a low battery trouble/has been restored
MA/R
E(3) 84-082
R(3) 84-082
XT-82/XR-82
[347]
Siren 4 Low Battery/Rest. Siren 4 has a low battery trouble/has been restored
MA/R
E(3) 84-083
R(3) 84-083
XT-83/XR-83
[347]
Repeater 1 Low Battery/
Rest.
Repeater 1 has a low battery trouble/has been restored MA/R
E(3) 84-090
R(3) 84-090
XT-90/XR-90
[347]
Repeater 2 Low Battery/
Rest.
Repeater 2 has a low battery trouble/has been restored MA/R
E(3) 84-091
R(3) 84-091
XT-91/XR-91
[347]
Repeater 3 Low Battery/
Rest.
Repeater 3 has a low battery trouble/has been restored MA/R
E(3)84-092
R(3)84-092
XT-92/XR-92
[347]
Repeater 4 Low Battery/
Rest.
Repeater 4 has a low battery trouble/has been restored MA/R
E(3)84-093
R(3)84-093
XT-93/XR-93
[347]
Installer Lead In
Installer Programming has been entered
MA/R
E(6)27-000
LB-00
Installer Lead out
Installer Programming has been exited
MA/R
E(6)28-000
LS-00
[347]
Keypad 1 Fault/Rest.
A wireless supervision fault has occurred/been restored
for Keypad 1
MA/R
E(3)8A-070
R(3)8A-070
UT-70/UJ-70
[347]
Keypad 2 Fault/Rest.
A wireless supervision fault has occurred/been restored
for Keypad 2
MA/R
E(3)8A-071
R(3)8A-071
UT-71/UJ-71
[347]
Keypad 3 Fault/Rest.
A wireless supervision fault has occurred/been restored
for Keypad 3
MA/R
E(3)8A-072
R(3)8A-072
UT-72/UJ-72
[347]
Keypad 4 Fault/Rest.
A wireless supervision fault has occurred/been restored
for Keypad 4
MA/R
E(3)8A-073
R(3)8A-073
UT-73/UJ-73
[347]
Siren 1 Fault/Rest.
A wireless supervision fault has occurred/been restored
for siren 1
MA/R
E(3) 8A-080
R(3) 8A-080
UT-80/UJ-80
[347]
Siren 2 Fault/Rest.
A wireless supervision fault has occurred/been restored
for siren 2
MA/R
E(3) 8A-081
R(3) 8A-081
UT-81/UJ-81
[347]
Siren 3 Fault/Rest.
A wireless supervision fault has occurred/been restored
for siren 3
MA/R
E(3) 8A-082
R(3) 8A-082
UT-82/UJ-82
[347]
Siren 4 Fault/Rest.
A wireless supervision fault has occurred/been restored
for siren 4
MA/R
E(3) 8A-083
R(3) 8A-083
UT-83/UJ-83
[347]
Repeater 1 Fault/Rest.
A wireless supervision fault has occurred/been restored
for Repeater 1
MA/R
E(3) 8A-090
R(3) 8A-090
UT-90/UR-90
[347]
Repeater 2 Fault/Rest.
A wireless supervision fault has occurred/been restored
for Repeater 2
MA/R
E(3) 8A-091
R(3) 8A-091
UT
-91/UR-91
[347]
Repeater 3 Fault/Rest.
A wireless supervision fault has occurred/been restored
for Repeater 3
MA/R
E(3) 8A-092
R(3) 8A-092
UT-92/UR-92
Section #
Reporting Code
Code Sent When...
Dialer
Direction*
Automatic
Contact ID
Codes
SIA Auto
Rep Codes** Appendix A: Reporting Code Formats
85
[347]
Repeater 4 Fault/Rest.
A wireless supervision fault has occurred/been restored
for Repeater 4
MA/R
E(3) 8A-093
R(3) 8A-093
UT-93/UR-93
[347]
Panel Firmware Update
Begin/ Successful
A local firmware update has begun/ was completed
successfully
MA/R
E(9)03-003/
R(9)03-003
LB-00/LS-00
[348]
Walk Test Begin/End
Beginning of test/End of test
T
E(6)A7-UUU
R(6)A7-UUU
TS-UU/TEUU
[348]
Periodic Test
Periodic system test transmission
T
E(6)A2-000
RP-00
[348]
System Test
[*][6] bell/communications test
T
E(6)A1-000
RX-00
[609]
Keypad 1 Tamper/Rest.
A tamper condition has been detected/restored from
Keypad 1
T/R
E(3)83-070
R(3)83-070
TA-70/TR-70
[609]
Keypad 2 Tamper/Rest.
A tamper condition has been detected/restored from
Keypad 2
T/R
E(3)83-071
R(3)83-071
TA-71/TR-71
[609]
Keypad 3 Tamper/Rest.
A tamper condition has been detected/restored from
Keypad 3
T/R
E(3)83-072
R(3)83-072
TA-72/TR-72
[609]
Keypad 4 Tamper/Rest.
A tamper condition has been detected/restored from
Keypad 4
T/R
E(3)83-073
R(3)83-073
TA-73/TR-73
[609]
Siren 1 Tamper/Rest.
Tamper condition detected/restored for siren 1
T/R
E(3)83-080
R(3)83-080
TA-80/TR-80
[609]
Siren 2 Tamper/Rest.
Tamper condition detected/restored for siren 2
T/R
E(3) 83-081
R(3) 83-081
TA-81/TR-81
[609]
Siren 3 Tamper/Rest.
Tamper condition detected/restored for siren 3
T/R
E(3) 83-082
R(3) 83-082
TA-82/TR-82
[609]
Siren 4 Tamper/Rest.
Tamper condition detected/restored for siren 4
T/R
E(3) 83-083
R(3) 83-083
TA-83/TR-83
[610]
Alternate Communicator
Receiver 1 Trouble/Restore
The Atl. Comm. has detected receiver 1 has gone
absent or failed to initialize/is present and has been
initialized
MA/R
E(3)5A-001
R(3)5A-001
YS-01/YZ-01
[610]
Alternate Communicator
Receiver 2 Trouble/Restore
The Atl. Comm. has detected receiver 2 has gone
absent or failed to initialize/is present and has been
initialized
MA/R
E(3)5A-002
R(3)5A-002
YS-02/YK-02
[610]
General Alternate
Communicator Trouble/
Restore
The Atl. Comm. has detected/restored a Radio/SIM
failure, Cellular Trouble, Ethernet Trouble, or SMS
Config Trouble
MA/R
E(3)53-955
R(3)53-955
YX-01/YR-01
[611]
Repeater 1 Tamper/Rest.
T
amper condition detected/restored for Repeater 1
T/R
E
(3)83-090
R(3)83-090
TA-90/TR-90
[611]
Repeater 2 Tamper/Rest.
T
amper condition detected/restored for Repeater 2
T/R
E
(3)83-091
R(3)83-091
TA-91/TR-91
[611]
Repeater 3 Tamper/Rest.
T
amper condition detected/restored for Repeater 3
T/R
E
(3)83-092
R(3)83-092
TA-92/TR-92
[611]
Repeater 4 Tamper/Rest.
T
amper condition detected/restored for Repeater 4
T/R
E
(3)83-093
R(3)83-093
TA-93/TR-93
[611]
Repeater 1 AC trouble/Rest. AC
power loss detected/restored for Repeater 1
T/R
E(3)A1-090
R(3)A1-090
AT-90/AR-90
[611]
Repeater 2 AC trouble/Rest. AC
power loss detected/restored for Repeater 2
T/R
E(3)A1-091
R(3)A1-091
AT-91/AR-91
[611]
Repeater 3 AC trouble/Rest. AC
power loss detected/restored for Repeater 3
T/R
E(3)A1-092
R(3)A1-092
AT-92/AR-92
[611]
Repeater 4 AC trouble/Rest. AC
power loss detected/restored for Repeater 4
T/R
E(3)A1-093
R(3)A1-093
AT-93/AR-93
*
**
***
****
A/R = alarms/restores; T/R = tampers/restorers; O/C = openings/closings; MA/R = miscellaneous alarms/restores; T = test
transmissions
UU = user number (user01-16,40); ZZ = zone number (01-34).
Use the “Fail to close” event code [(4)54] to report closing or activity delinquency. Ensure the central station is aware that
this
code is used.
Zones and panic pendants are identified, wireless keys can be identified for openings and closings.
Section #
Reporting Code
Code Sent When...
Dialer
Direction*
Automatic
Contact ID
Codes
SIA Auto
Rep Codes** SCW9055/9057 Wireless Alarm System
86
Contact ID Zone Alarm/Restore Event Codes
(as per SIA DCS: ‘Contact ID’ 01-1999):
Program any of these codes for zone alarms/restores when using the standard (non-automatic) Contact ID reporting format.
Zone Definition
SIA Auto Rep
Codes
Contact
ID Auto
Rep
Codes
SIA Format Automatic Zone Alarm/Restore Codes
Delay 1
BA-ZZ/BH-ZZ
(1) 3A
Medical Alarms
(1)34 Entry / Exit
Delay 2
BA-ZZ/BH-ZZ
(1) 3A
(1)AA Medical
(1)35 Day / Night
Instant
BA-ZZ/BH-ZZ
(1) 3A
(1)A1 Pendant Transmitter
(1)36 Outdoor
Interior
BA-ZZ/BH-ZZ
(1) 3A
(1)A2 Fail to Report In
(1)37 Tamper
Interior Stay/Away
BA-ZZ/BH-ZZ
(1) 3A
Fire Alarms
(1)38 Near Alarm
Delay Stay/Away
BA-ZZ/BH-ZZ
(1) 3A
(1)1A Fire Alarm
General Alarms
24-Hr. Supervisory
US-ZZ/UR-ZZ
(1) 5A
(1)11 Smoke
(1)4A General Alarm
24-Hr. Supervisory Buzzer
UA-ZZ/UH-ZZ
(1) 5A
(1)12 Combustion
(1)43 Exp. Module Failure
24-Hr. Burg
BA-ZZ/BH-ZZ
(1) 3A
(1)13 Water Flow
(1)44 Sensor Tamper
24-Hr. Gas
GA-ZZ/GH-ZZ (1) 51
(1)14 Heat
(1)45 Module Tamper
24-Hr. Heat
FA-ZZ/FH-ZZ
(1) 58
(1)15 Pull Station
(1)4A Cross Zone Police Code
24-Hr. Medical
MA-ZZ/MH-ZZ (1) AA
(1)16 Duct
24 Hour Non-Burglary
24-Hr. Panic
PA-ZZ/PH-ZZ
(1) 2A
(1)17 Flame
(1)5A 24 Hour non-Burg
24-Hr. Emergency
QA-ZZ/QH-ZZ (1) A1
(1)18 Near Alarm
(1)51 Gas Detected
24-Hr. Water
WA-ZZ/WH-ZZ (1) 54
Panic Alarms
(1)52 Refrigeration
24-Hr. Freeze
ZA-ZZ/ZH-ZZ
(1) 59
(1)2A Panic
(1)53 Loss of Heat
Interior Delay
BA-ZZ/BH-ZZ
(1) 3A
(1)21 Duress
(1)54 Water Leakage
Instant Stay/Away
BA-ZZ/BH-ZZ
(1) 3A
(1)22 Silent
(1)55 Foil Break
24-Hr. Non-latching Tamper
TA-ZZ/TR-ZZ
(3) 83
Burglar Alarms
(1)57 Low Bottled Gas Level
Day Zone
BA-ZZ/BH-ZZ
(1) 3A
(1)3A Burglary
(1)58 High Temp
Night Zone
BA-ZZ/BH-ZZ
(3) 83
(1)31 Perimeter
(1)59 Low Temp
Delayed 24-Hr. Fire (Wireless)
FA-ZZ/FH-ZZ
(1) 1A
(1)32 Interior
(1)61 Loss of Air Flow
Standard 24-Hr. Fire (Wireless)
FA-ZZ/FH-ZZ
(1) 1A
(1)33 24 Hour
(1)34 Entry / Exit
24-Hr. Auto Verified Fire (Wireless) F
A-ZZ/FH-ZZ
(1) 1A
24-Hr. CO Alarm
GA-ZZ/GH-ZZ (1) 62
ZZ = zones 01-34 Appendix B: 2-Way Audio Verification (SCW9057 only)
87
Appendix B: 2-Way Audio Verification (SCW9057 only)
The following information is intended for use by the Central Station Operator.
• The SCW9057 Audio Verification provides Talk and Listen-in capability for audio verification of alarms. This allows the central station to communi-
cate with the occupants through the microphone and speaker of the alarm system.
• After one or more alarms have been sent to the central station, the system holds the line for 90 seconds. During this period, the siren continues to
sound, indicating that a 2-way voice session is available and may be initiated. If any key is pressed by the user during this time, a 90-second 2-way
voice session begins in low gain listen-in only mode. The siren is silenced for the duration of the 2-way voice session and all microphones are turned
on. When the 2-way session terminates, the siren turns back on unless it has timed out.
• The commands indicated below are a subset of the SIA Audio Verification Standard (November 11, 1997).
The 2-way Audio Session
1.
Zone Violation:
A 2-way audio session begins with the violation of a zone that has zone attribute 9 enabled.
By default, the following do NOT initiate a 2-way session:
• Supervisory, zone 9
• Keyswitch zones, zone 22 and 23
• 24-Hour Non-Alarm (local), zone 26
• 24-Hour Non-Latching Tamper, zone 36
• 24-Hour Carbon Monoxide (wireless), zone 81
• Fire Zones, zone 87, 88, 89 and the Fire Key
For more information, see section [101]-[134], attribute 9 in Chapter 5.
By default 1-way audio (Listen-in only) is initiated by the following:
• Silent Panic events (Silent [P], Silent Panic zone)
• Duress alarm
2.
Communication to the Monitoring Station:
One of the reporting codes/actions listed below is sent to the monitoring station when the appropri-
ate alarm is triggered.
3.
Alerting the Operator:
When the reporting code is received by the monitoring station or a 2-way session is automatically initiated, a 2-way Initi-
ation (Start) tone will be sounded to alert the operator. A high (1800 Hz) tone and a low (900 Hz) tone are used to generate the tones listed below.
Short tone duration is 100ms. Long tone duration is 1 second.
4.
Initiating, Control and Termination of the Session:
The Operator controls the session the using the Audio Control Telephone Key Functions
listed in the table below. To select the commands, press [*][0] followed by the key number(s) indicated below:
VOX Support:
When in VOX mode the alarm panel automatically switch between the phone line and internal microphone/speaker being active depen
d-
ing on which one is loudest. Push to Talk overrides VOX – this is performed by switching into a talk mode at the monitoring station.
Hang-up Auto-detection:
The alarm panel automatically disconnects if the central station receiver disconnects before the operator picks up the line.
The panel will consider five seconds of continuous dial tone, or busy tone to be a disconnect condition.If the operator does NO
T terminate the call using
the disconnect command (99), the alarm panel will consider five seconds of continuous dial tone, or busy tone to be a disconnect condition.
Bell/Buzzer Silent During 2-Way Audio:
When the panel has an audible alarm, the bell can be programmed to remain active until the 2-Way Audio
session starts and then the bell will be silent (Section [600], option 7 off) to allow the user to hear the operator. All buzzer activity, except keypresses,
will be silent when 2-way audio is active. If the panel has not been disarmed at the termination of the 2-Way Audio session, the bell will restart for the
timeout duration. Door chime is disabled during a 2-way Audio session. Any activity that normally sounds door chime will occur and the door chime
will not sound.
Format
Reporting Code/Event
SIA
L90
Contact ID
606
BPS
Communicates the Event, then automatically enters into 2-way Audio mode.
2-way Initiation (Start) Tone:
3 Hi Tones (Short)
After the third short Hi tone has sounded, the panel switches directly into ‘Listen-in” mode without a keypress from the monitoring
station.
Reminder Tones:
1 Hi Tone (Short)
1 Short hi tone indicates 20 seconds are left in the audio session.
1 low Tone
1 Short low tone indicates 10 seconds are left in the audio session.
Subsequent Alarm:
1 Hi Tone Long
1 long hi tone indicates a new alarm event if Section [023] Option 6 (
New Alarms will not disconnect 2-way Audio
) is enabled, alarms
are delayed. If disabled the audio session will terminate.
NOTE: Receiving a subsequent alarm event tone will not restart the 90 second session timer.
Subsequent Fire Event:
Hi, Low, Hi
(Short)
3 short (100ms) tones Hi, Low, Hi indicates a new Fire alarm if Section [023] Option 6 (
New Alarms will not disconnect 2-way Audio
)
is enabled. If disabled the audio session will terminate.
NOTE: Receiving a subsequent alarm event tone will not restart the 90 second session timer.
Key
Command
Description
1/4
Talk to Speaker
Connects the monitoring station to the speaker.
2
VOX Mode
Connects the monitoring station to the system in VOX Mode (see VOX Support below).
3/6
Listen to Microphone
Connects the monitoring station to the microphone.
4
Lo-Gain Talk to Speaker
Connects the monitoring station to the speaker at the low volume output level.
6
Lo-Gain Listen to Microphone
Connects the monitoring station to the microphone at the low gain input level.
7
Extend Time
Restarts the session timer (90 seconds) to prevent timeout. To extend the time and take no other action use
this function. Pressing any key automatically extends the time.
99
Disconnect
Disconnects the session. The second “9” must be pressed within 1 second of pressing the first “9.” Use the
“Disconnect” key sequence before hanging up during a Talk / Listen-In session. SCW9055/9057 Wireless Alarm System
88
Appendix C: Communicator Format Options
The following format options are programmable in section [350]
on page 28
01
02
20 BPS, 1400 Hz handshake
20 BPS, 2300 Hz handshake
• BPS Formats - 0 is not valid in Account or Rep Code (A must be used).
Depending on the pulse format, the panel communicates using the following: 3/1, 3/2, 4/1 or 4/2, 1400 or 2300 Hz handshake, 20
bits per second, non-extended.
Digit “0” sends no pulses and is used as a filler. When programming account numbers enter four digits. When programming a three digit account number the fourth
digit must be programmed as a “0” which will act as a filler digit. If an account number has a “0” in it, substitute a HEX digit “A” for the “0.”
Examples:
• 3 digit account number [123]- program [1230]
• 3 digit account number [502] - program [5A20]
• 4 digit account number [4079] - program [4A79]
Two digits must be entered when programming reporting codes. If one digit reporting codes are used, the second digit must be programmed as “0”. If “0” is to be trans-
mitted, substitute a HEX digit “A” for the “0”.
Examples:
• 1 digit reporting code [3] - program [30]
• 2 digit reporting code [30] - program [3A]
To prevent the panel from reporting an event, program the reporting code for the event as [00] or [FF].
03
DTMF Contact ID
• ADEMCO Contact ID-0isnotv
alid in Account or Rep Code (A must be used, 10 in checksum)
Contact ID is a specialized format that communicates information quickly using tones rather than pulses. The format also allows more information to be sent. For
example, rather than reporting an alarm zone 1, the Contact ID format can also report the type of alarm, such as Entry/Exit alarm zone 1.
If
Contact ID Sends Automatic Reporting Codes
is selected, the panel automatically generates a reporting code for each event. These identifiers are listed in Appen-
dix A. If the Automatic Contact ID option is not selected, reporting codes must be programmed. The 2-digit entry determines the
type of alarm. The panel automatically
generates all other information, including the zone number.
NOTE:If Automatic Contact ID is selected, the panel automatically generates all zone and access code numbers, eliminating the need to program these items.
NOTE:The zone number for Zone Low Battery and Zone Fault events will not be identified when Pulse formats are used.
If the
Contact ID uses Automatic Reporting Codes
option is enabled, the panel will operate as follows:
• If an event’s reporting code is programmed as [00], the panel will not attempt to call the central station.
• If the reporting code for an event is programmed as anything from [01] to [FF], the panel automatically generates the zone or access code number. See Appendix A
for a list of transmitted codes.
If the
Contact ID uses Programmed Reporting Codes
option is enabled, the panel will operate as follows:
• If an event’s reporting code is programmed as [00] or [FF], the panel will not attempt to call central station.
• If the reporting code for an event is programmed as anything from [01] to [FE], the panel will send the programmed reporting code.
Account numbers must be four digits:
• If the digit “0” is in the account number substitute the HEX digit “A” for the “0.”
• All reporting codes must be two digits.
• If the digit “0” is in the reporting code substitute the HEX digit “A” for the “0.”
• To prevent the panel from reporting an event, program the reporting code for the event as [00] or [FF].
See: Contact ID Sends Automatic Reporting Codes section [381], Option [7]
04
SIA FSK
• SIA -0 is valid in Account or Rep Code (not 00 in a Reporting code)
• SIA -0 uses 300 Baud FSK as the communication media. Account Code can be 4 or 6 hexadecimal digits. Reporting codes must be 2 digits. The SIA format
transmits a 4 (or 6) digit account code, 2 digit identifier code and 2 digit reporting code. The 2 digit identifier is pre programmed by the panel.
SIA is a specialized format that communicates information quickly using frequency shift keying (FSK) rather than pulses. The SI
A format automatically generates the type of sig-
nal being transmitted, such as Burglary, Fire, Panic etc. The two digit reporting code is used to identify the zone or access code number.
If the SIA format is selected the panel can be programmed to automatically generate all zone and access code numbers eliminating the need to program these items.
If the
SIA Sends Automatic Reporting Codes
option is enabled the panel will operate as follows:
1. If the reporting code for an event is programmed as [00] the panel will not attempt to call the central station.
2. If the reporting code for an event is programmed as anything from [01] to [FF] the panel will AUTOMATICALLY generate the zone or access code number.
3. During a partial closing, all bypassed zones are reported.
Communicator Call Direction Options
can be used to disable reporting of events such as Openings/Closings. Also, if all the Opening/Closing reporting codes were
programmed as [00] the panel would not report.
If the
SIA Sends Automatic Reporting Codes
option is disabled the panel operates as follows:
1. If the reporting code for an event is programmed as [00] or [FF] the panel will not attempt to call the central station.
2. If the reporting code for an event is programmed as anything from [01] to [FE] the panel will send the programmed reporting code.
3. During a partial closing, bypassed zones are not reported.
NOTE:The zone number for Zone Low Battery and Zone Fault events will not be identified when Programmed SIA is used.
See: SIA Sends Automatic Reporting Codes - Section [381], Option [3],
Communicator Call Direction Options - Section [351] to [376],
SIA Identifiers - Appendix A
06
Residential Dial
If Residential Dial is programmed and an event that is programmed to communicate occurs, the panel will seize the line and dial the appropriate telephone number(s). Once
the dialing is complete, the panel will emit an ID tone and wait for a handshake (press a 1, 2, 4, 5, 7, 8, 0,

or # key from any telephone). It will wait for this handshake for
the duration of
Post Dial Wait for Handshake
timer. Once the panel receives the handshake, it will emit an alarm tone over the telephone line for 20 seconds. If several
alarms occur at the same time, only one call will be made to each telephone number the panel is programmed to call. Appendix D: Regulatory Approvals Information
89
Appendix D: Regulatory Approvals Information
North America
FCC COMPLIANCE STATEMENT
will provide advance notice in order for you to make necessary modifications to main-
tain uninterrupted service.
Equipment Maintenance Facility
If trouble is experienced with this equipment (SCW9055) for repair or warranty infor-
mation, contact the facility indicated below. If the equipment is causing harm to the
telephone network, the Telephone Company may request that you disconnect the
equipment until the problem is solved. This equipment is of a type that is not intended
to be repaired by the end user.
DSC c/o APL Logistics 757 Douglas Hill Rd., Lithia Springs, GA 30122
Additional Information
Connection to party line service is subject to state tariffs. Contact the state public util-
ity commission, public service commission or corporation commission for informa-
tion.
Alarm dialing equipment must be able to seize the telephone line and place a call in an
emergency situation. It must be able to do this even if other equipment (telephone,
answering system, computer modem, etc.) already has the telephone line in use. To do
so, alarm dialing equipment must be connected to a properly installed RJ-31X jack
that is electrically in series with and ahead of all other equipment attached to the same
telephone line. Proper installation is depicted in the figure below. If you have any
questions concerning these instructions, you should consult your telephone company
or a qualified installer about installing the RJ-31X jack and alarm dialing equipment
for you.
CAUTION: Changes or modifications not expressly approved by
Digital Security Controls could void your authority to use this
equipment.
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B
digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to
provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential instal-
lation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy
and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause
harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee
that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does
cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be deter-
mined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to cor-
rect the interference by one or more of the following measures:
•Re-orient the receiving antenna.
•Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
•Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which
the receiver is connected.
•Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/television technician for help.
The user may find the following booklet prepared by the FCC useful: “How to
Identify and Resolve Radio/Television Interference Problems”. This booklet is
available from the U.S. Government Printing Office, Washington D.C. 20402,
Stock # 004-000-00345-4.
IMPORTANT INFORMATION
This equipment complies with Part 68 of the FCC Rules and, if the product was
approved July 23, 2001 or later, the requirements adopted by the ACTA. On the
side of this equipment is a label that contains, among other information, a product
identifier. If requested, this number must be provided to the Telephone Company.

Product Identifier
US:F53AL01B9057 USOC Jack:RJ-31X
Telephone Connection Requirements

A plug and jack used to connect this equipment to the premises wiring and tele-
phone network must comply with the applicable FCC Part 68 rules and require-
ments adopted by the ACTA. A compliant telephone cord and modular plug is
provided with this product. It is designed to be connected to a compatible modular
jack that is also compliant. See installation instructions for details.
Ringer Equivalence Number (REN)
The REN is used to determine the number of devices that may be connected to a
telephone line. Excessive RENs on a telephone line may result in the devices not
ringing in response to an incoming call. In most but not all areas, the sum of
RENs should not exceed five (5.0). To be certain of the number of devices that
may be connected to a line, as determined by the total RENs, contact the local
Telephone Company. For products approved after July 23, 2001, the REN for this
product is part of the product identifier that has the format US:
AAAEQ##TXXXX. The digits represented by ## are the REN without a decimal
point (e.g., 03 is a REN of 0.3). For earlier products, the REN is separately shown
on the label.
REN = 0.1B
Incidence of Harm
If this equipment (SCW9055/57(D)(G)(I)(-SM)-433) causes harm to the tele-
phone network, the telephone company will notify you in advance that temporary
discontinuance of service may be required. But if advance notice is not practical,
the telephone company will notify the customer as soon as possible. Also, you
will be advised of your right to file a complaint with the FCC if you believe it is
necessary.
Changes in Telephone Company Equipment or Facilities
The Telephone Company may make changes in its facilities, equipment, opera-
tions or procedures that could affect the operation of the equipment. If this hap-
pens the Telephone Company
INDUSTRY CANADA STATEMENT
NOTICE: This product meets the applicable Industry Canada technical specifications.
Le présent materiel est conforme aux specifications techniques applicables d’Industrie
Canada.
The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) for this terminal equipment is 0.1. L'indice
d'équivalence de la sonnerie (IES) du présent matériel est de 0.1.
The Ringer Equivalence Number is an indication of the maximum number of devices
allowed to be connected to a telephone interface. The termination on an interface may
consist of any combination of devices subject only to the requirement that the sum of
the RENs of all the devices does not exceed five.
L’indice d’équivalence de la sonnerie
(IES) sert à indiquer le nombre maximal de terminaux qui peuvent être raccordés à une
interface téléphonique. La terminaison d’une interface peut consister en une combinai-
son quelconque de dispositifs, à la seule condition que la somme d’indices d’équiva-
lence de la sonnerie de tous les dispositifs n’excède pas 5.
The term “IC:” before the radio certification number only signifies that Industry Can-
ada technical specifications were met.
Certification Number:
IC: IC:160A-9057 (Models SCW9055/57-433)
IC:160A-9057G (Models SCW9055/57(D)(G)(I)(-SM)-433
This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003.
Cet appareil numérique de la classe B est conforme à la norme NMB-003 du Canada.
This device complies with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s). Opera-
tion is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interfer-
ence, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may
cause undesired operation of the device.
Cet appareil est conforme avec Industrie Canada exempts de licence standard RSS (s).
Le fonctionnement est soumis aux deux conditions suivantes: (1) cet appareil ne peut
pas provoquer d'interférences et (2) cet appareil doit accepter toute interférence, y
compris les interférences qui peuvent causer un mauvais fonctionnement de l' appareil. SCW9055/9057 Wireless Alarm System
90
This product has been tested and found in compliance with the following standards:
UL1023 Household Burglar-Alarm System Units
UL985 Household Fire Warning System Units
UL1635 Digital Alarm Communicator System Units
ULC-S545-02Residential Fire Warning System Control Units
ORD-C1023-1974Household Burglar-Alarm System Units
This product has also been tested and found in compliance with the ANSI/SIA CP-01-2010 Control Panel Standard – Features for Fa
lse
Alarm Reduction.
This product is UL/ULC listed under the following categories:
UTOU/UTOUC Control Units and Accessories, Household System Type
NBSX/NBSXC Household Burglar Alarm System Units
AMTB Control Panels, SIA False Alarm Reduction
The product is labeled with the UL and ULC listing marks along with the SIA CP-01 compliance statement (Also Classified in acco
r-
dance with SIA-CP-01 Standard) as proof of compliance with the above mentioned standards. For further information on this produ
ct’s
listings please also refer to the official listing guides published at the UL web site (www.ul.com) under Certifications Section.
UL/ULC Residential Fire and Burglary Installations:
For ULC Installations refer to the Standard for the Installation of Residential Fire Warning Systems, CAN/ULC-S540.
• All burglary-type zones shall be configured with SEOL or DEOL configuration
(refer to section [133] and [134], bit 15 or 16 shall be ON)
• Use at least one WS4916 Smoke Detector for Fire Installations (refer to section [001], fire zone shall be programmed as type 89)
• The entry delay shall not exceed 60 seconds (refer to section [005])
• The exit delay shall not exceed 120 seconds (refer to section [005])
• The minimum Bell Time-out is 4 minutes (refer to section [005])
Note: For ULC Residential Fire Installations the minimum Bell Time-out is 5 minutes
• Temporal Three Fire Signal shall be enabled (refer to section [013], option 8 shall be ON)
• Arm/Disarm Bell Squawk shall be enabled when using wireless key WS4939 (refer to section [014], option 1 shall be ON)
• Auxiliary Power boost shall be enabled (refer to section [014], option 4 shall be ON)
• A code shall be required for bypassing (refer to section [015], option 5 shall be ON)
• Trouble beeps shall be enabled (refer to section [023], option 7 shall be ON)
• AC trouble indication LED shall be enabled (refer to Keypad Programming, section [075], options 5 and 6 shall be ON)
• DACT Communicator shall be enabled for Supervising Station Monitoring (refer to section [380], option 1 shall be ON).
Note: The DACT communicator for this product has no line security.
• Telephone Line Monitoring (TLM) shall be enabled (refer to section [015], option 7 shall be ON)
Note: This product is programmed to perform 5 attempts for communication of an event to the supervising station. If unsuc-
cessful, a Fail To Communicate (FTC) trouble is generated.
• Test transmission cycle shall be set for monthly transmission (refer to section [377])
Note: For ULC Residential installations set for daily test transmission
• Wireless Supervision window shall be enabled (refer to Wireless Programming, sections [804] [82] to [85])
• Wireless Supervision window shall be set to 4h for Fire Installations (refer to Wireless Programming, section [804][81] shall be pro-
grammed with the value [16]
• Wireless Supervision window shall be set to 24h for Burglary Installations only (refer to Wireless Programming, section [804][81]
shall be programmed with the value [96]
• RF Jam detection shall be enabled (refer to Wireless Programming, section [804] [900], option 7 shall be OFF)
• Bells will be active During 2-way Audio (refer to section [600], opt 7 shall be ON)
• New Alarms will Disconnect 2-way Audio (refer to section [023], opt 6 shall be OFF)
• When the 2- way audio feature is enabled (section [601] option 1-3 is ON) ensure that section [023] option 6 is OFF and sectio
n [600]
option 7 is ON
Programming
The notes in the programming sections describing the system configurations for UL/ULC listed installations shall be implemented.
Bell Location
The alarm sounding device (bell) shall be located where it can be heard by the person operating the security system during the daily
arming and disarming cycle.
Casual Users
The installer should caution the user(s) not to give system information (e.g. codes, bypass methods, etc.) to casual users (bab
y-sitters or
service people). Only the One-Time Use codes shall be given to casual users.
User Information
The installer should advise the users and note in the User’s Manual:
• Service organization name and telephone number
• The programmed exit time
• The programmed entry time
• Test system weekly SIA False Alarm Reduction Installations
91
SIA False Alarm Reduction Installations
For a list of the defaults value programmed when the unit is shipped from the factory and for any other programming information refer to Appendix D: False Alarm Reduction.
Caution
Call Waiting Cancel (Section [382], Option 4) feature on a non-Call Waiting line will prevent successful communication to the supervising station.
Fire Alarm Verification feature (Auto Verified Fire Zone type [89]) is supported on the DSC Wireless Smoke Detector, Model WS4916. The fire alarm delay is 40s.
Notes
Programming at installation may be subordinate to other UL requirements for the intended application.
Cross zones have the ability to individually protect the intended area (e.g. motion detectors which overlap).
Cross zoning is not recommended for line security Installations nor is to be implemented on exit/entry zones.
There is a communication delay of 30 seconds in this control panel. It can be removed, or it can be increased up to 45 seconds at the option of the end user by consulting with
the installer.
Do not duplicate any reporting codes. This applies for all communication formats other than SIA or CID sending automatic programmed reporting codes.
The security system shall be installed with the sounding device activated and the communicator enabled for transmission using SIA or CID format.
SIA Feature
Programming Section
Comments
Range/Default
Requirement
Exit Time
[005], 3rd entry
Access to Entry and Exit delays and Bell Time Out for the system
Range
:
45- 255 seconds
Default:
60 sec.
Required
(programmable)
Progress Annunciation/
Disable - for Silent Exit
[014], Option 6 ON
Enables audible exit beeps from the keypad for the duration of exit delay
Keypads may be disabled
Default:
Enabled
Allowed
Exit Time Restart
[014], Option 2 ON
Enables the exit delay restart feature
Default:
Enabled
Required
Auto Stay Arm on
Un-vacated Premises
[001]-[002] Zone type 05, 06
Function Key: Stay Arming. All Stay/Away type zones (05, 06) will be automati-
cally bypassed
If no exit after full arm
Default:
Enabled
Required
Exit Time and Progress
Annunciation/Disable
or Remote Arming
[005] and [014] bit 6
System Times and Audible Exit beeps can be disabled when using the Key fob to
arm away the system
Default:
Enabled
Allowed
Entry delay(s)
[005], 1st and 2nd entry
Access to Entry and Exit delays and Bell Time Out for the system
Note: Combined Entry delay and Communications Delay (Abort Window) shall
not exceed 60s
Range: 30 sec. to 4 min.
Default:
30 sees
Required
(programmable)
Abort Window

for Non-Fire zones
[101]-[134] bit 6 ON
Access to zone attributes, i.e, swinger shutdown, transmission delay and cross
zone. Individual zones attribute bit 6 (Transmission delay) is by default ON
May be disabled
by zone or zone type
Default:
Enabled
Required
Abort Window - for
Non-Fire zones
[377], 4th entry
Access to the programmable delay before communicating alarms
Note: Combined Entry delay and Communications Delay (Abort Window) shall
not exceed 60s
Range: 20 - 45 sec.
Default:
30 sees
Required
(programmable)
Abort Annunciation
[382], Option 3 ON
Enables the “Communication Canceled” message display on keypad
Annunciate that no
alarm was transmitted
Default:
Enabled
Required
Cancel Annunciation
[328], 8th entry
Access to the reporting code for Alarm Canceled
Annunciate that a
Cancel was transmitted
Default:
Enabled
Required
Communications Canceled
Window
[377], 11th entry
Access to the programmable Cancel Window
Range: 001-255 min.
Default:
5 min.
Required
Duress Feature
[*][5] Master Code
Option 2 ON
Do not derive code from an existing Master/User code (e.g., Master code is 1234,
the duress code should not be 1233 or 1235)
No 1+/- derivative of another
user code. No duplicates with
other user codes
Default:
disabled
Allowed
Cross Zoning
[016] Option 1
[101]-[134] bit 8 OFF
This option enables Cross Zoning for entire system. Individual zones can be
enabled for Cross zoning via Zone attribute bit 8 in sections [101] - [134]
Programming required
Default:
Disabled
Required
Cross Zone Timer
[176]
Access to the programmable Cross Zone timer
May program
Range: 001-255 sec./min.
Default:
60 seconds
Allowed
Swing
er Shutdown for Alarms
[377] 1st entry
Access to the swinger shutdown limit for zone alarms.
For all non-fire zones
shut down at 1 or 2 trips
Default:
2 trips
Required
(programmable)
Swinger Shutdown Enable
[101] - [134] bit 6 ON
Access to zone attributes, i.e., swinger shutdown, transmission delay and cross
zone. Individual zones attribute bit 6 (Swinger shutdown enabled) is by default ON
For non-police
response zones
Default:
Enabled
Allowed
24-Hr. Auto_verified Fire

(Wireless) Zone type [89]
Access to 24-Hr. Auto_verified Fire (Wireless)
Activates If a restore is Not
received within the specified
time
Default:
disabled
Required
Call Waiting Cancel Dial
String
[304], [382], Option 4 OFF
Access to the dialing sequence used to disable call waiting
Dependant on user phone line
Default:
disabled
Required
System Test:
[*][6] Master Code, Option 4
The system activates all keypad sounders, bells or sirens for 2 seconds and all keypad lights turn on.
Refer to the
User Manual (part no. 29007827).
Walk Test Mode:
[*][6] Opt 8
This mode is used to test each zone on the system for proper functionality.
Alarm Communications
During Walk Test
[382] Option 2:
Enables Communication of zone alarms while Walk Test is active.
Walk Test End and Begin
Reporting Codes
[348], 1
st
and 2
nd
Entries
Access to the reporting codes for Walk Test Begin and Walk Test End. SCW9055/9057 Wireless Alarm System
92
NOTES: © 2014 Tyco International Ltd. and its Respective Companies. All Rights Reserved.
The trademarks, logos, and service marks displayed on this document are registered in the United States [or other countries]. A
ny
misuse of the trademarks is strictly prohibited and Tyco International Ltd. will aggressively enforce its intellectual property
rights
to the fullest extent of the law, including pursuit of criminal prosecution wherever necessary. All trademarks not owned by Tyco
International Ltd. are the property of their respective owners, and are used with permission or allowed under applicable laws.
Product offerings and specifications are subject to change without notice. Actual products may vary from photos. Not all produc
ts
include all features. Availability varies by region; contact your sales representative.
Technical Support: 1-800-387-3630 (Can/US)
905-760-3000 (Intl.) www.dsc.com


Uploaded